You are on page 1of 296

HANDBOOK

of

MECHANICAL DESIGN

'7S~
/

HANDBOOK
of

MECHANICAL DESIGN
BY

GEORGE

NORDENHOLT

F.

Editor of Product Engineering

JOSEPH KERR
Managing Editor

of Product Engineering

AND

JOHN SASSO
Associate Editor of Product Engineering

First Edition

Third Impression

McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY,


NEW YORK AND LONDON
1942

Inc.

HANDBOOK OP MECHANICAL DESIGN


CksPYRIGHT, 1942, BY THE

McGraw-Hill Book Company,

Inc.

PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA


All rights reserved. This book, or
parts thereof,

may not

be reproduced

in any form without permission of


the publishers.

THE MAPLE PRESS COMPANY, YORK,

PA.

PREFACE
Many engineering departments, perhaps most, compile and keep up to date a
manual which may be called the standards book, reference book, engineering department standards, or which may be given some other name. Also, many design
In such books will be found a vast fund
engineers build their own book or manual.
of engineering data and many methods of design procedure not found in existing
handbooks.

When

Product Engineering was launched as a pubhcation to serve the design


was obvious to the editors that a great service could be rendered to the
profession by gathering and publishing data, information, and design procedures such
Thus, the first number of
as are contained in engineering department manuals.
Product Engineering in January, 1930, contained a reference-book sheet for design
Soon
calculations, a feature which has been continued in practically every number.
afterward, there was added to Product Engineering's editorial content another regular
engineers,

it

feature, a two-page spread illustrating standard constructions, possible variations

by

which to achieve a desired result, and similar design standards covering constructions,
drives, and controls.
It was soon found impossible to meet all the requests for additional copies of
reference-book sheets and design standards. The demand continued to increase and
numerous readers suggested that the material be compiled into book form and pubIt was in answer to this demand that the authors compiled this book.
lished.
Other than the major portion of the chapter on materials and a few other pages
that have been added to round out the treatment of certain subjects, all the material
in this book appeared in past numbers of Product Engineering, although some of it has
been condensed or re-edited. Very little of the material in this book can be found in
the conventional handbooks, for this Handbook of Mechanical Design contains practically no explanations of theoretical design.
It confines itself to practical design
methods and procedures that have been in use in engineering design departments.
The authors wiU welcome suggestions from users of this book and especially
desire to be notified of any errors.
We wish to make special acknowledgment of the material on typical designs
appearing in Chapters IV and VI, by Fred Firnhaber, now of Landis Tool Company;
the nomograms by Carl P. Nachod, vice-president of the Nachod & U. S. Signal Co.;
the standard procedure in the design of springs

by W. M.

Griffith of Atlas Imperial

Company; the spring charts by F. Franz; the methods for calculating


and other nomograms by Emory N. Kemler, now associate professor of
mechanical engineering at Purdue University; the nomograms for engineering calculations by M. G. Van Voorhis, now on the editorial staff of Product Engineering; and
to S. A. Kilpatrick and 0. J. Schaefer for their brilliant series of articles, which have
Diesel Engine

belt drives

PREFACE

vi

slightlj^ condensed form, on the design of formed thin-sheet aluminumAcknowledgment is also made here of data on properties of materials
contributed by the Alimiinum Company of America, United States Steel Corporation,
and the American Foundrymen's Association.
Other engineers whose contributions to Product Engineering have been incorporated in this book are H. M. Brayton, 0. E. Brown, E. Cowan, C. Donaldson, R. G. N.
Evans, C. H. Leis, A. D. McKenzie, G. A. Schwartz, A. M. Wasbauer, B. B. Ramey,

been included in

alloy sections.

Harper, H. M. Richardson, G. A. Ruehmling, T. H. Nelson, E. Touceda,


Rigby, R. S. Elberty, Jr., and G. Smiley.
J.

W.

George

F.

Nordenholt,

Joseph Kerr,

John Sasso.
New

York,

April, 1942.

W.

S.

CONTENTS
Pa.qe

Preface

CHAPTER

Charts and Tables for General Arithmetical Calculations

Arc length versus Central Angle. Chordal Height and Length of Chord. Length of Material for Bends.
Volumes in Tanks, Horizontal Round. Volumes in Tanks, Vertical Round. Volume,
Circular Segments.
Weight, and Cost. Weights of Cylindrical Pieces. Chart of Unit and Total Weights. Chart of Weights
and Volumes. Moment of Inertia of Prisms; Flywheels; Gears and Armatures. Radii of Gyration.
Transferring Moments of Inertia to Parallel Axis.
WR^ of Symmetrical bodies. Centrifugal Force.
Mean Cooling Temperature. Solution of
Forces in Toggle Joint. Linear Motion. Rotary Motion.
Ohm's Equations. Total Resistance of Parallel Circuits.

CHAPTER

II

Materials

33

Cast Irons. Alloy Cast Irons. Effect of Nickel and Chromium on Cast Iron.
Malleable Iron Castings. Cast Carbon Steels. High Alloy Cast Steels. Low Alloy Cast Steels. CorroIron-nickel-chromium Alloys. AlumiProperties of Stainless Steel.
sion and Heat-resistant Cast Steels.
num Base Alloys. Magnesium Base Alloys. Insulating Materials. Plastic Materials. Phenolic
Selection of Materials.

Laminated Molded Materials.

Steels for

Automotive Parts.

CHAPTER

III

Beams and Structures

71

Thin Aluminum Sheet

Sections.
Compression Members. Angles in Compression.
Shear Resisting Webs. Diagonal Tension Webs. Hollow
Box Sections Subjected to Torsion. Chart for Determining Bending Moments. Deflection of
Girders.
Variously Loaded Beams. Stresses in Cantilever Beams. Tensile Strength of Round Wires. Rectangular
Stress Calculations for

Shear Members.

Moments

Vertical

Stiffeners

for

of Inertia.

CHAPTER

IV

Latches, Locks and Fastenings

95

Locking Devices. Retaining and Locking Detents. Wire Locks and Snap Rings. Taper- Pin Applications.
Hinges and Pivots. Clamping Shoes and Plugs. Lock Bolts and Indexing Mechanisms. Machine
Clamps. Door and Cover Fastenings. Bolt Diameter, Load, and Stress.

CHAPTER V
Springs

121

Spring Wire Specifications. Design Stresses. Torsional Moduli. Allowable


Based on Endurance Limits. Natural Frequency. Formulas for Helical Springs. Permissible
Manufacturing Tolerances. Form for Design Calculations. Standard Drawings for Springs. Table of
Wire Gages and Diameters, with Their Squares, Cubes, and Fourth Powers. Inspection and Testing of

Designs of Helical Springs.


Stresses

Graphical Solution of Helical Spring Formulas. Helical Spring Charts for Specified Ratio of
Designs of Tension Spring Ends. Graphical Designs of Flat Cantilever Springs.
Graphical Designs of Semielliptic Laminated Springs.

Springs.

Loads and Lengths.

59376

CONTENTS

viil

Page

CHAPTER

VI

Power Transmission Elements and Mechanisms


Flexible Couplings.

151

Shaft Diameters for Torsion and Bending.

Shaft Diameters for Torsional Deflection.

Shaft Diameters for Lateral Deflection. Shaft Diameters A.S.M.E. Code. Two-bearing Shafts of
Uniform Strength. Stress in Rotating Disk. Velocity Chart for Gears and Pulleys. Flat-belt Length and
Flat-belt Speed-Horsepower Charts.
Belt Horsepower Charts. Flat-belt Horsepower
and V-belt Horsepower Charts. V-belt Lengths. Short-center Belt Drives. Chart for
Calculating Needle Bearings. Thrust Bearing Friction Moments. Bronze Bearing Alloys. Shaft Seals.
Gibs and Guides.
Roller-Bearing Seals. Sleeve-bearing Seals. Safety Gears. Shifting Mechanisms.
Cam Designs. Variable-speed Devices. Transport Mechanisms. Automatic Feed Hoppers. Glueapplying Mechanisms.

Pulley Diameter.
Charts.

Flat

CHAPTER

VII

Drwes and Controls

207

WR^. Analysis of Motor Load. Selection of Motor Type. Inquiry 'Form for Electric
Motors. Winding Connection Diagrams for Multispeed Motors. Electric Control Methods. Electrically
Operated Values. Automatic Timers. Trigger Switch Mountings. Thermostatic Mechanisms. Automatic Stops.
Significance of

CHAPTER

VIII

Design Data on Production Methods


Fusion

Welding.

Welding.
Die Casting.

Resistance

Permanent Mold Casting.

251
Flame Hardening. Centrifugal Casting.
Flame Cutting. Powdered Metal Pressings.

Furnace Brazing.
Forging.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


CHAPTER

CHARTS AND TABLES


For General Arithmetical Calculations
The

charts and

nomograms

in this chapter include only those pertaining to

Nomograms,

general arithmetical calculations, as hsted below.


for use in the design of specific

machine elements or structures

and tables
be found in the

charts,

will

chapters devoted to the design of those elements or structures.

Moment

Len^jth

of Inertia, Radius of Gyration,

and

Page

Arc Length vs. Central Angle


Chordal Height and Length of Chord
Length of Material for Bends

WRPage

Prisms

16

Flywheels, Gears, and Armatures

17

Radii of Gyration
Transferring to Parallel Axis

17

WR-

19

Area

of

18

Symmetrical Bodies
Force

Circular Segments

8
Centrifugal

26

Forces in Toggle Joint

27

Volume
Tanks, Horizontal Round
Tanks, Vertical Round
Volume, Weight, and Cost

Force, Velocity,

9
10
11

and Acceleration

Linear Motion

28

Rotary Motion

29

Heat and Temperature

Mean

Weight

Cooling Temperature

CyUndrical Pieces
Unit and Total Weight

12
14

Solution of

Weight and Volume

15

Total Resistance of Parallel Circuits

30

Electrical

Ohm's Equations.

31

32

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


ARC LENGTH VERSUS CENTRAL ANGLE
(Angle of Bend, Length, and Radius)

Draw

a straight hne through the two

known

points.

The answer

will

at the intersection of this line with the third scale.

Example: For a

6-in. radius

and 45-deg. bend, length

of arc is 4.7 in.

be found

CHARTS AND TABLES


CHORDAL HEIGHT AND LENGTH OF CHORD

^vill be found
a straight line through the two known points. The answer
at the intersection of this line with the third scale.
height h of
Example: Length of chord is 3 in., and radius of circle is 4 in. The

Draw

the chord

is

0.29

in.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


LENGTH OF MATERIAL FOR

90 -DEG.

BENDS

As shown in Fig. 1, when a sheet or flat bar is bent, the position of the neutral plane with respect to the outer and
For a sharp corner,
inner surfaces will depend on the ratio of the radius of bend to the thickness of the bar or sheet.
As the radius of the bend is
the neutral plane will lie one-third the distance from the inner to the outer surface.
This
increased, the neutral plane shifts until it reaches a position midway between the inner and outer surfaces.
factor should be taken into consideration when calculating the developed length of material required for formed pieces.
The table on the following pages gives the developed length of the material in the 90-deg. bend. The following
formulas were used to calculate the quantities given in the table, the radius of the bend being measured as the distance
from the center of curvature to the inner surface of the bend.
For a sharp corner and for any radius of bend up to T, the thickness
1
a 90-deg. bend will be
.

L =
2.

for

(-D

For any radius of bend greater than 2T, the length

L =
3.

1.5708

of the sheet, the developed length

for a 90-deg.

bend

will

be

(r +
^^

1..5708

R=

For any radius of bend between IT and 2T, the

T= Stock thickness

Inside radius

value of L as given in the table was found by interpolation


The developed length L of the material in any bend
other than 90 deg. can be obtained from the following

-M h-

Neutral

1t-5*>2

irl

line

formulas:
1.

For a sharp corner or a radius up to T:


T

L =
2.

0.0175 (li

For a radius

L =

of

+ t) X
2T

degrees of bend

Sharp corner

R=Torless

or more:

5(S+|)

0.0175

R=iTto2T
Fig.

R= 2T or more

1.

degrees of bend

For double bends as shown

in Fig.

2, if fii

X = V2BiR, +Ri- B/2)


With Ri, Ri, and B known:
flo - B
fl,
""^ ^ =
rT+rT
L = 0.0175(S, + R2)A
where A is in degrees and L is the developed

-|-

Ss

is

greater than B:

-t-

If

Ri

Y =B

Ri

is less

cosec

The value

of

than B, as in Fig.

{Ri

X when B

+
is

fl2)(cosec

cotan A)

greater than Ri

X =B
The

length.

3,

total developed length

cot

Ri

To

be
7S2)

(cosec

A -

cotan A)

0.0175(^1 4- R2)A

'

simplify the calculations, the table on this page gives the equations for X, Y, and the developed length for
common angles of bend. The table on following pages gives L for values of R and T for 90-deg. bends.

EQUATIONS FOR
Angle A,
deg.

required for the material in the straight section plus that in the two arcs will be

L = Y
various

will

-h {Ri

X, Y,

AND DEVELOPED LENGTHS

CHARTS AND TABLES


DEVELOPED LENGTH IN INCHES OF MATERIAL REQUIRED FOR

90-DEG.

BEND

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


DEVELOPED LENGTH IN INCHES OF MATERIAL REQUIRED FOR

90-DEG.

BEND

{Continued)

CHARTS AND TABLES


DEVELOPED LENGTH IN INCHES OF MATERIAL REQUIRED FOR

7
90-DEG.

BEND

(Continued)

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

AREAS OF CIRCULAR SEGMENTS


-50

-7000
-40
5,000

F-2
-

3,000

2,000

-30

1,000

-20

1^

500

0.9

rO.8

A=

-0.7

Note: The ang/e

0.01745 R^arc cos


is

-~

300
- (R-H)Vh('2R-H)

-200

expressed in degrees
~

100
10

0.5

0.5

-7

E-30

i-20

0.4"

=-5

<.

10

-5
-0.3

=-3

'-2

-0.25

-2
-0.2
hO.5
-0.3
-0.2

-0.15
^0.1

h 0.05
0.03

0.1

=-0.02

Dra'w a straight

line

through the two kno'wn points.

The answer

will

be found

at the intersection of this line with the third scale.

Example: For a
sq. in.

10-in. radius

and

4.0 in.,

H/R =

0.40

in.

Area

A =

46

CHARTS AND TABLES

VOLUMES

IN

HORIZONTAL ROUND TANKS WITH FLAT ENDS

F-30

/Turning

line

Notes: Shift decimal point on volume


scale two' points for a one-point

sliift

on

diameter scale; one point for a one-point


shift on length scale.

= 0.9 ft. H/D = 0.15. Join 0.15 on


Example: Tank is 6 ft. in diameter and 15 ft.' long.
scale with 6 on diameter scale.
From point of intersection with turning line, draw line to
15 ft. on the length scale.
The volume scale shows 300 gal. If D had been 0.6 ft.,
0.09 ft.,
and length the same, the answer would be 3.00 gal.

H/D

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

10

VOLUMES
10

IN VERTICAL

ROUND TANKS WITH FLAT BOTTOMS

r^'OOO

f-io

-9

^9
r4,000

-8

'-7

r- 3,000

-2,000

-6

r6
- 1,000
800

^5

-5
^600

r80
f-60

-2

40
30

Draw a straight line through the two known


points.

-20

The answer

^6

be found at the

In reading the answer on the volume scale,


decimal point on volume scale two places
for one-place shift on diameter scale, and
one place for one-place shift on height scale.
Example: Diameter of tank is 4 ft. Depth
of liquid is 2.5 ft.
Volume as read is 230 gal.
If diameter of tank is 0.4 ft. and depth 2.5 ft.,
shift

r-10

will

intersection of this line with the third scale.

volume

is

2.3 gal.

CHARTS AND TABLES


VOLUME, WEIGHT, AND COST CHART

11

12

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

CHARTS AND TABLES


WEIGHTS OF CYLINDRICAL
Diam-

PIECES,

POUNDS PER INCH OF LENGTH

13
(Continued)

14

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


UNIT AND TOTAL WEIGHTS

Draw a straight line


througli the two known
The answer will be
points.
found at the intersection of
with the third scale.
Example: Given 7 pieces

this line

per

pound

or 0.143

lb.

per

piece; 15 pieces weigh 2.15 lb.

1
1

CHARTS AND TABLES

15

WEIGHT AND VOLUME


Q09Z
Aluminum

0.065

Mercury

Magnesium

0.5 i

0.50

-|-Q05 Fiber

0.40

Monel mefai
Copper
Mckel
\\
Pfios. bronze
1
I

Brass

Cl
\

0.35

0.3/

Steel 0.285
Cast iron
Roiled zinc
0.06

^'^'^

K,^,
1

0-253

- -

y^^

>,

--0,05
0.22-1

0.20

Q030

1.7

017

0.025

1.5

0.15

H-

1.2

0.020

0.015

012

0.010

Draw

a straight line through the two known points.


at the intersection of this line with the third scale.
Exam-pie: 4 cu. in. of aluminum weighs 0.37 lb.

QIO

-I

The answer

will

be found

16

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

MOMENT OF

INERTIA OF A PRISM ABOUT THE AXIS

aa

CHARTS AND TABLES


RADII OF GYRATION FOR ROTATING BODIES
Solid

cylinder

about

own

its

axis

Hollow
cylinder

about

own

ii2

7-2i

-j-

r'^.

its

axis

Rectan-

KC-1

gular

prism
about

R^

12

axis

through
center

Rectanl-c-1

ri

gular

prism
about

fl2

4b^

+ c'
12

axis at

one end
l^c-M

Rectangular

prism
about
outside

R'

462

-I-

c2 -f

12bd
12

12d-

17

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

18

CHART FOR TRANSFERRING MOMENT OF INERTIA


7

7o

WX'-

X- Distance Be+ween the Parallel Axes0.5

0.75

1.2


1.6

1.4

1.7
I

1.8
I

1.9
I

2
I

in

2.1

2.2
I

Inches

2.3
I

2.4

2\5

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.9

CHARTS AND TABLES

19

WR^ OF SYMMETRICAL BODIES


For computing WR'^ of rotating masses of weight per unit volume p, by resolving the body into
See page 208 for effect of WR^ on electric motor selection.

elemental shapes.

Note: p in pounds per cubic incli and dimensions in inches give WR'^ in Ib.-in. squared.
1.

Weights per Unit Volume

of Materials.

Weight, Lb.
per Cu. In.

Material
Cast iron

260
250
0.283
0.319
0.410
0.318
.

Cast-iron castings of heavy section

i.e.,

flywheel rims

Steel

Bronze

Lead
Copper
2.

Cylinder, about Axis Lengthwise through the Center of Gravity.

\o\Mme = '^L{D\- D\)


4
(a)

For any material:


WR-'

where p
(6)

is

~ pL{D\ - DS)

the weight per unit volume.

For cast

iron:

WR'-

= L{D\ - DS)
39.2

(c)

For cast iron (heavy sections)

LjDS - PS)
^^ _
~
40.75
(d)

For

steel

LjDh - D\)
WR^ =
36.0

3.

Cylinder, about an Axis Parallel to the Axis through Center of Gravity.

Volume
(a)

For any material:

(6)

For

L{D\ - D\)

^g
steel:

*^""-""

4.50

^yj

4. Solid Cylinder, Rotated about an Axis Paredlel to a Line that Passes through the Center of
Gravity and Is Perpendicular to the Center Line.

V
r

If
11

'

Volume = ^

D'-L

(a)

For any material:

(b)

For

steel:

WR "'"

4.50 Vl2

16

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

20
5.

to

Rod

of Rectangular or Elliptical Section,

Rotated about an Axis Perpendicular

and Passing through the Center Line.


For rectangular cross sections:

K, = }U;
For

K, =

elliptical cross sections:


IT

Volume = K^abL
(a)

For any material

WR
(b)

'x'-x'

For a cast-iron rod of

wm
6.

Elliptical Cylinder,

^ + T,{n + L)

= pahLU

4:90

elliptical section (p

[y +

''^^^^

+ ^) +

K,a '}
0.260)

leJ

about an Axis Parallel to the Axis through the Center of

Gravity.

Volume =
(a)

abL

For any material:


16

(b)

7.

For

steel:

Cylinder with Frustum of a Cone

Volume =

WR\_a =

8.

Frustum

of a

2(Di

abL /a-

OOV

16

b'-

Removed

>.,)

irpL

8(Di

D2)

Cone with a CyUnder Removed.


ttL

Volume =
2(Z)i

WP2
wa,_, =

D2)

'^
8(i)i

D2)

{D\

^ iD\
4

\{D\ -D\)\

CHARTS AND TABLES


Solid

9.

Frustum

of a Cone.

Volume
V uiumt; =

- D,)
{D\ - D\)
(Di - D2)

12

(Di

TTpL

160

10.

21

Chamfer Cut from Rectangular Prism Having One End Turned about a

Center.

Distance to center of gravity, where

f^

ii2S5
volume X {1
>2

R2/R1 and

- 3A +

(A'

A)

- A -A
+ ^[1
^(^1
hC

A =

log,
log.

B =

C/2Ri

2)

+ Af(^^-2^ +

jj

l)

+ J^^(3A^-4A^+l)
672 A

-H

Volume

jR\B

(2A^
TnT-.
40 A

^10

log,

- 3A +

3)

log,^-

(1

1)

^-^

(4^^
^-n
224 A
^

- 2A +

B^-{A'

5A*

1)

l)

1)

-A) + ^f^(2A'-3A^ +

Volume
l^i^Vs

22)^2

= "^-^

(D'

3r^)

Outside Part of a Torus.

Volume =
g-

-a-A)

Complete Torus.
J

12.

B^
|-

1)

gg^^ |(A^ _ 4A +

WR\^.

11.

2A

?^{<-A)

(1

I- -9 a
1

Z)2

M^i2=

Trpr-

27rr

(5^+4.)+,.=(|z>+Ar);

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

22
13. Inside

Part of a Torus.

T
-g

Volume =

WR\^, =

14.

Circular

TTpr^

Segment about an Axis through Center

a = 2

axis

12

X area

-^ 4r""

Area =

-i!

(a)

Any

For

229:2

"

229:2

15. Circular

6 r^"^

sin

;^^ deg.

ZK

i2= a

114.59

i^-

2 / 2

V^' ~ Y;

Segment about Any Axis

V^

V^

Parallel to an Axis through the Center of

(Refer to 14 for Figure.)

WR%.-.'

16,

of Circle.

steel:

WP2

the Circles.

-A'):

material

FE^_. = pT
(5)

\2

Gravity

'^

2irr

= WR\_.

weight

{r'

r^)

Rectangular Prism about an Axis Parallel to the Axis through the Center of

Gravity.

Volume =
-W

AT

(a)

For any material:

WR\_. = pWLT

(h)

WLT

For

^"^ +

if)

1-^2 +

^'
[

steel:

-j-x

^^^-- =

3:534

CHARTS AND TABLES


17. Isosceles

23

Triangular Prism, Rotated about an Axis through Its Vertex.

Volume =
f-

axis

CUT
2

pCHT
\2

Triangular Prism, Rotated about

18. Isosceles

Any Axis

12/

Parallel to

an Axis

through the Vertex.

Volume =

CHT

WK.._^.

\2

9^+V

12

19. Prism with Square Cross Section and Cylinder Removed, along Axis through
Center of Gravity of Square.

Volume = L {h- -

WR\^, =

20.

Any Body about an Axis


Known.

"^

'^)

{l.miH'

Parallel to the Gravity Axis,

When

D')

WR"^ about the

Gravity Axis Is

-y

-en'^/A

WR\^, = WR\_,

>'*-/i

weight

r^

^Pc
'-<^//e/,

o*/s

21. WR'' of a Piston, Effective at the Cylinder Center Line, about the Crankshaft
Center Line.

'^^^
where

r =
L =

^''^'

crank radius
center-to-center length of connecting

rod

Q
Wj,

i)
=

weight of complete piston, rings, and pin

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

24

WR^

22.

Connecting Rod, Effective at the Cylinder Center Line, about the

of a

Crankshaft Center Line.

WR^ =
where

=
L =

r'

(- +
+ Tf4J

Fi

W2 =

crank radius

Wr =
Li =

rod
weight of the lower or rotating part of
the rod = [Wr(L Li)]/L

8L2-

weight of the upper or reciprocating part


of the rod = WrLi/L
W2, the weight of the complete rod
Wi

center-to-center length of connecting

Wi =

distance from the center line of the crank-

pin to the center of gravity of the con-

necting rod

Mass Geared

23.

question

to a Shaft.

The

equivalent

at the shaft in

flyvi^heel effect

is

WR^ = h^iWR'Y
where h

=
_

(WR"^)'

gear ratio

mass geared to shaft

r.p.m. of

flywheel effect of the

about

its

own

body

in question

axis of rotation

r.p.m. of shaft

Mass Geared

24.

Main

to

r>*-j^~ Driven

,^2)'

Shaft and Connected by a Flexible Shaft.

gear

C^^^^j
'""^^

of the

mass

(TT^i?-)'

gear on the main shaft

'^^^

=
_
""

{WR^y =

gear ratio

flywheel effect of geared-on mass

The equivalent

torsional
shaft, in

sec.

connecting
pound-inches per radian
of

rigidity

flexible

flywheel effect of the driven

T\^

mass at the

is

WR^ =

Vi^
^ yDriving

V4

9.775C

natural torsional frequency of the shafting

driving shaft

-^1

/HS
\

C =

r.p.m. of driving gear

"

system, in vibrations per

r.p.m. of driven gear

25. Belted Drives.

Driven

is

("TFTP'VP
^

^^n
r..nr
Driving gear

where h

effect

^KWR'^y

K _

TI7P2
VV

^Mainshaff

The

at the position of the driving

^'^'^'
"

9.775C

pulley

puiiey

where h

C = R^AE/L
A = cross-sectional area of
E = modulus of elasticity

= Rx/R

~
[WR-y =

r.p.m. of pulley belted to shaft


r.p.m. of shaft

flywheel effect of the driven

about

/ =

its

natural

own

frequency of the

system, in vibrations per

sec.

of belt material in

tension, in lb. per sq. in.

body

axis of rotation

torsional

belt, in sq. in.

R =
L =

radius of driven pulley, in

in.

length of tight part of belt which


of the pulley, in in.

is

clear

CHARTS AND TABLES


26. Effect of the FlexibiUty of

WR^

Flywheel Spokes on

25

WR^

Rim.The

of

effective

of the rim is

iWR')'

WR' =

{WRyp

m
where (WR^)'
/

=
=

9.775(7

flywheel effect of the rim

^ _

the system of which the fly-

wheel

is

a member,

= number of spokes
E = bending modulus of

where g

in vibra-

tions per sec.

C =

12Eka^bR (

natural torsional frequency of

torque required to move the


rim through one radian relative
to the

elasticity of the

spoke material

hub

and h
rectangular section spokes
7r/64 for elliptical,

}^2 for

All dimensions are in inches.

For cast-iron spokes

of elliptical section:

E =
C =

15

X lO*^ lb.
XIO'/L

ga'bR
0.1132L2

per sq.

in.

Ib.-in.

(i+!-0 radians

Note: It is found by comparative calculations that with spokes of moderate taper very
assuming the spoke to be straight and using cross section at mid-point for area calculation.

little

error

is

involved in

TYPICAL EXAMPLE

The

flywheel

shown below

Diesel engine installation.


to determine effective
of

is

used in a

Part

Formula

of fly

It is required

WR- for calculation

IFie=

wheel
10[(52)^

ural

The

anticipated nat-

frequency of the system

is

(r)

16a
neglecting
/ ir^
L^ \

Section A-A

Note: Since the beads at the ends of the spokes comprise


but a small part of the flywheel WR', very little error
will result in assuming them to be of rectangular cross
section.
Also, because of the effect of the clamping
bolts, the outer hub will be considered a square equal
to the diameter.
The spokes will be assumed straight
and of mid-point cross section.

12

(rf)

56

ie)

26

if)

2.375[(43)-

26

(b)

56.4

vibrations per sec.

(43)^]

40.75

one of the natural frequencies of tor-

sional vibration.

2f

(o)

19

(39) <]

955,300

26

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


CHART FOR DETERMINING CENTRIFUGAL FORCE
F =

0.000341 M^i^n^

F7

10,000

r-8iOOO
'-

6,000

-4,000
3,000

2,000

10

R= Radius of Gyration

15

20

in Ft.

30

40

50 60

80

100

CHARTS AND TABLES

27

FORCES IN TOGGLE JOINT WITH EQUAL ARMS


P ^ S^
F

10,000

8,000

-:

6,000

-:

5,000

4,000

-:

II i|iiii|i

ii

0.1

0.2

iii|ii

i|iii

0.3

0.4 0.5 0.6

i
I

4/i

0.8

I
'

" " ""|""

i"| " l""


i

'

'
'

'

'

10

in in.

Example: Use mutually perpendicular lines drawn on tracing cloth or celluloid.


In the example given for S = 10 in. and h = 1 in., a force F of 10 lb. exerts pressures P
of 25 lb. each.

28

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


ACCELERATED LINEAR MOTION

2S

T-

2S

8 i9

32.16F

= G

W
20

10

30

ft per sec.
per sec.

40

50

I,...i,..,l,..,

60
I

80

^100
WLb.

=
F =
(S =
T =
F
W
G =
*

turning point
velocity at time T, in

ft.

per sec.

distance passed thi-ough, in

time during which force


accelerating force, in

ft.

acts, in sec.

lb.

weight of moving body, in


constant acceleration, in

lb.

ft.

per sec.

120 140

100

CHARTS AND TABLES

29

ROTARY MOTION
P ^ S ^ 2irRn
V
F

12
'

'

60

'l|llll|llll|

l|IMP|l

o
O
tX3

o
o
O O
O

U-

CO

o d

4-

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

30

MEAN COOLING TEMPERATURE

e;-l

CHARTS AND TABLES

31

SOLUTION OF OHM'S EQUATIONS


Volts

100

Ohms
1 1000

500

50
100

Draw

a straight line through the two

The values

two unknowns

known

points.

be found at the
intersections of this line with the other two scales.
Use boldface scales or lightface scales according to
10

100

of the

position of decimal point.

will

aoi'0.1

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

32

TOTAL RESISTANCE OF PARALLEL CIRCUITS


1

J_+
+ ...
+ +
R2
Ri
Rz

Ri

For convenience, list the resistances of the different parallel circuits in descending order
Locate Ri on the diagonal scale and connect it with ^2 on the horiof magnitude.
total resistance is found at the intersection with the Total Resistance
The
scale.
zontal
For more than two parallel circuits, project horizontally from the intersecon the Total Resistance diagonal to the diagonal Resistance Ri, draw a
line to i? 3 on the horizontal scale, and the answer will again be found at the
Repeat successively for
intersection with the Total Resistance diagonal.
diagonal.

tion point

additional resistances Rt, Ri, etc.

The light dashed

lines indicate the

procedure for finding the total

resistance of five parallel circuits, Ri =100, R^

Ri =

30, Rti

25.

The answer

as given

Conversely, the resistances of individual parallel


cuits to give a desired total resistance can

from

Rs =

60,

by the chart

40,

is 8.0.

cir-

be determined

this chart.

|ll

llll

ll

|ll

Ol

M|llll|l

ll l[

lll l|ll ll|I

UI|

lll

lpl

l|

ll

lll|ll

l|nil

|l

ll

|N

I|l

lll|MII|lll

10

20

30

40

60
50
Resisi'ances,

70

80

R2,R3,R4""

90

100

110

120

CHAPTER

II

MATERIALS
Page

Page

34

Properties of Stainless Steel

Cast Irons

35

Alloy Cast Irons

36

Iron-Nickel-Chromium Alloys
Wrought Brasses and Bronzes
Corrosion-resisting Metals and Alloys
Aluminum Base Alloys
Magnesium Base Alloys

Selection of Materials

Effect of Nickel

and Chromium on Cast Iron

38

Malleable Iron Castings

39

Cast Carbon Steels

40

High Alloy Cast

42

Low

Steels

Alloy Cast Steels

Corrosion and Heat-resistant Cast Steels ....

Insulating Materials
Plastic Materials

44

Phenolic Laminated Molded Materials

46

Steels for

33

Automotive Parts

50
52
54
58
60
64
65
66
68
70

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

34

SELECTION OF MATERIALS
The

universal problem in engineering design

is

the selection of the materials from which the

various parts of the device, machine, or product are to be made.

It

is

also the first

problem because

the material selected will govern the allowable stresses, the types of construction that might be

adopted, the manufacturing methods employed, the assembly operations, the finishes that might be
applied, and, of greatest importance, the cost

and

by the materials

But the

relative

The

ably for different types of design.

is

designs,

will

importance of the different properties

unit strength of the material

many

selected.

determine which
vary considerpractically always a factor

In practically every design, the physical and other properties required


materials might be used.

In

sales appeal of the product.

the commercial success or failure will be determined definitely

will

though often a minor one.


For constructions subjected to only a steady tension, the yield point on the

stress-strain curve
can withstand with a specified elongation,
But for a compression-loaded column, both the tensile strength and
will be the first consideration.
For vibratory or repeated stresses, the endurance limit of
the elastic modulus must be considered.
the material becomes the governing strength consideration, whereas for low-temperature service and
shock loads the impact values are of great importance. And, of course, there is also to be considered
the compressive strength or the shear strength, according to the type of stresses to which the mem-

or the yield strength of the material,

i.e.,

the unit tension

it

ber will be subjected.


In addition to the unit strength considerations, any one or a group of almost innumerable other
properties must be considered.
If, as in most machine tools, it is important to have little or no

damping capacity, such as cast iron, might be considered


Hardness, wear resistance, porosity, and ductility are some of the other properties that may
be of major importance.
In addition to physical properties; corrosion resistance, heat conductivity, electrical conductivity, dielectric strength, frictional properties, and many others may enter into the problem.
There is no formula or equation by which the most suitable material from the standpoint of
properties can be selected.
Nor is il always advisable to use the material that has the highest values
Invariably the final selection must be a compromise largely because two
for the properties desired.
other important factors enter into the problem, namely, the workability of the material and its cost.
vibration, a material with a high vibration

first.

When

number

have been selected, each of which possesses the desired


properties to a satisfactory degree, the next step toward the final selection is the determination of
the manufacturing methods that might be employed. Aluminum, zinc, and many of the nonIron, steel, aluminum, and some
ferrous alloys naturally suggest die-casting, stamping, and forging.
a

of different materials

other metals offer great possibilities

bj^

virtue of their weldability.

Casting

is

suitable for almost

metals and alloys. Plastics are mostly molded; some are sheet-laminated or are in the form of
To mention only a few other manufacturing processes, we have impact
sheets; a few are extruded.
all

drawn shapes and rolled shapes, and roll-formed sheet sections.


has been determined what types of construction might be used, the design must be
analyzed with reference to such things as the use of inserts, consolidating different parts into one

extrusion, die extrusion,

After

it

standard purchased parts, and similar possibilities.


hand with the types of construction that might be employed are the costs of machining,
Included in this category may be pimchgrinding, and other operations, which will vary greatly.
ing, hand reaming, riveting, buffing, and polishing.
Not until all the factors discussed above have been studied closely and analyzed should any
piece, use of

Hand

in

consideration be given to the cost per

that aluminum at 30
per

cts.

per

lb.

pound

of the material.

or zinc at 10

cts.

per

lb. is

A complete analysis may often reveal


cheaper to use than gray iron at 5 cts.

lb.

A complete analysis of all the items to be considered in the selection of materials and the associated problems of types of constructions and workability considerations would require volumes and
even then would obscure the problem rather than clarify it. In the final analysis, nothing can be
substituted for clear engineering thinking based on broad experience and knowledge.

MATERIALS

35

CAST IRONS
GRAY IRON
Per Cent
by Weight

Chemical Composition
Graphitic carbon

Combined carbon
Iron

0.25-0.3

Silicon

Manganese.
Sulphur
Phosphorus

Lb. per Sq. In.


21,000- 42,000
36,000- 60,000
70,000-200,000
15,000,000

Tensile strength

Shear strength
Compressive strength

Gray

0.5 - 1
0.07- 0.12
0. 10- 1.05

Average Physical Properties

Modulus

-3

0.8 max.
93.7 -94.3

of elasticity

iron ordinarily

is

easily machinable.

WHITE IRON
Per Cent
Chemical Composition

by Weight

Graphitic carbon

Trace
3 30
94.93
0.60
52
0.15
0. 50

Combined carbon

Iron......
Silicon

Manganese

Sulphur
Phosphorus

Average Physical Properties


Tensile strength

per Sq. In.


20,000-70,000

Modulus

20 ,000 ,000

Lb.

of elasticity

White iron

is difficult

to machine.

When

not heat-treated, white iron has great

resistance to wear bj^ abrasion.

MOTTLED IRON
Per Cent
Chemical Composition

by Weight

Graphitic carbon

50
80
95.07
0.92
36

Combined carbon
Iron
Silicon

Manganese
Sulphur
Phosphorus

0. 13
0.

22

Mottled iron is a mixture of gray iron and white iron.


ChUled cast iron are those parts of castings which after pouring are cooled
quickly by chills in order to retain the carbon in the iron carbide form found in white
iron, whereas other parts of the casting cool slowly to form gray iron.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

36

ALLOY CAST IRONS


To

obtain exceptional properties such as high tensile strength, hardness, wear resistance, corroand heat resistance, many alloys of cast iron with other elements have been developed.

sion resistance,

The

effect of various alloying additions are indicated in the

accompanying

table.

EFFECTS OF ALLOYING ADDITIONS ON CAST IRON


Addition

MATERIALS
EFFECT OF ALLOYS ON CAST IRON
280
ro

37

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

38

EFFECT OF NICKEL AND CHROMIUM ON CAST IRON


Addition of Nickel.
1. Increases strength and elasticity
especially the sUicon content.
2.

3.
4.

when composition

of the iron

is

adjusted,

Refines the grain and reduces porosity.


Increases hardness.

Eliminates hard spots and thus improves machinability when nickel additions
amount to
to 4 per cent depending upon the sUicon content and section

thickness.
5.

6.
7.
8.

Decreases the amount of sihcon needed to keep castings gray and machinable.
Increases wearing quahties.

Improves impact resistance.


Improves heat and corrosion

resistance.

9. Raises electrical resistance.

Addition of Chromium.
1.

Improves

2.

Refines the grain.

3.

Increases hardness.

tensile strength.

Produces hard spots when used alone or in excessive

amounts.
4.

Increases chilling power, depth of

5.

Increases heat resistance.

6.

Increases wear resistance.

7.

Increases corrosion resistance.

chill,

and the combined carbon.

Decreases machinability.
Addition of Nickel and Chromium Together.
8.

1.

By using two or three


chromium

2.

is

parts of nickel to one of chromium, the chilling action of

restrained

and the

chromium are retained.


Amounts needed to obtain maximum

beneficial effects of

Increases strength and hardness.

and also hardness and strength, in castings of various


section thickness are shown in the accompanying table.
Applications for Nickel and Nickel -chromium Cast Iron.
Cylinders, cams, gears, hardware, bushings, machine frames, liners, and plates.
machining

qualities,

NICKEL AND CHROMIUM IN CAST IRON FOR MAXIMUM MACHINABILITY


Sections

}/i-}>4 in.

thick

MATERIALS

39

MALLEABLE IRON CASTINGS


AVERAGE MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Tensile strength,

per sq. in

lb.

Yield point in tension,


Elongation in 2 in

Reduction in area

Modulus

lb.

(see note 1)

19 per cent

of elasticity in tension, lb. per sq. in

Compressive strength (see note 2)


Ultimate shearing strength, lb. per
Yield point in shear,

Modulus

lb.

sq. in. (see

note 3)

48,000

per sq. in

23 ,000

lb.

12,500,000

per sq. in

24 ,000

of rupture in torsion, lb. per sq. in.

Brinell hardness

Charpy impact

Wedge

25,000,000

of elasticity in shear, lb. per sq. in

Yield point in torsion,

Modulus

54 ,000
36 ,000
18 per cent

per sq. in

58,000
100-140
16.5

number

value,

ft. -lb.

(see note 4)

impact (see note 4)


Fatigue endurance limit (no definite data, probably about 25,000 to 26,000
lb.

test for

per sq.

in.)

Effect of temperature (see note 5)

PHYSICAL CONSTANTS
7 15-7 45

Specific gravity

Shrinkage allowance, in. per ft


Coefficient of thermal expansion per deg.

M~^l6

0000066

Specific heat, c.g.s. units

0.

122

ELECTRICAL AND MAGNETIC PROPERTIES


Resistivity,

microhms per

28-37

cc

Magnetization properties (see note 6)


Magnetic hysteresis (see note 6)
Notes on Malleable Iron Castings
1.

Reduction of

restricted locally.

Area.^The elongation usually is spread quite evenly over the entire gage length, instead of being
This may be construed to mean that cohesion is more uniform in malleable iron than in other

ferrous metals.
2.

Compressive Strength.

In ductile ferrous metals, the yield point

tension that testing for the latter, being

much more

in compression so closely

approximates that in

easily determined, avoids the necessity of testing for the former.

Also, it is impractical to determine the compressive strength of such products, because once the yield point has been
passed the specimen flattens out, yielding no well-marked fracture.
In determining shear by the "direct method," approximate results only can be
3. Shear and Torsion Tests.
secured because a certain amount of distortion caused by the combined effect of compression and bending during the
Consequently, shearing properties are better studied from torsion tests. The number of
test can not be avoided.
twists per foot of length will furnish an estimate of the toughness of the material, and their distribution yields some
indication of the variation in hardness which tends to cause an uneven localization of the twists, there being less

distortion at planes of greater hardness.


4. The wedge test will furnish a more accurate idea of what can be expected of castings that are to be subjected to
shock and occasional overload in service than will a notched bar test, wherein the stresses are concentrated at the root

of the notch.
5.

carbon

Effect of Temperature.

reverted.
6.

If

malleable iron

is

heated to a temperature in excess of

its critical

range, the temper

back to the combined form, and if heated to around 1600F. practically


Malleable iron can be heated to around 800F. without loss in tensile properties.

will start to revert

Magnetization Properties.

When high permeability

temper carbon, whereas combined carbon or


and permeability and low hysteresis loss.

is

all of it

wOl be

required in iron, the carbctn should be in the form of


Malleable iron possesses high induction

free cemenite should be absent.

HANDBOOK

40

OF MECHANICAL DESIGN
CAST CARBON STEELS
Mechanical properties

Chemical composition

Carbon,
per

cent

0.11

ganese,

per

0.73

Phosphorus

Sili-

Sul-

con,

phur,

per

cent

per
cent

cent

0.27

0.027

0.028

per

Tensile
strength,
lb.

per

0.81

0.67
0.83

Under

Under

0.03

0.03

0.031

0.028

0.03

0.70
0.68
0.67
0.78

0.32
0.28
0.34
0.28

0.030
0.030
0.029

0.024
0.025
0.024

0.68

Impact

Hardness

per

area,

num-

cent

per
cent

bers"

33.0
13.2
28.2
29.5
31.0

36.0
30.0
53.0
59.5
54.0

34.0
28.5
34.0

52.5
40.2
49.0

3.7'
2.1

15.0'
13.7'

126B
119B
116B
126B

Treatment

Annealed
As cast

in

1650F. (900C.)
1825F. (995-0.)

(6).

furnace cooled
furnace cooled

(5).

furnace cooled

34,000
37,000

14.0
26.5

18.6
31.6

15'

As

36'

leoO-F. (870''C.), furnace cooled

70,000
71,500
74 500

36 500
46 500

51.2
58.0

16/
24/

48,000

33.0
34.0
32.0

55.1

26/

62,000
63 500

42,000
44,000

36.5
39.0

59.8
67.0

01

leSOT.

64'

1700F. (930C.)
1600F. C870''C.)
1200F. (650<'C.)

(1), air

cooled

(1). air

cooled

(1), air

cooled

149B
149B
156B

1650F. (gOO-C.)
1650-1^. (OOO-C.)
1650F. (900C.)

(3), air

cooled

(3), air

cooled

119B
136B

As received
lOSOT. (900C.)

32.0/

136B

(830'C.) (1), air cooled


air cooled; 1525F.
1650F. (900C.)
(1),
(830C.) (1), air cooled; 600F. (315C.)

34.0/

133B

1650F.

71,000
72,000
73,500
71,000

37.000
43.000
43,500

33.0
32.5
33.0
28.0

53.5
52.4
49.7
47.8

67,000
77,000

27,000
44,000

22.0
30.5

33.0
51.0

43,000

1650F. (900C.)

20.1/
32.6/

137B
139B
143B

As

cast

cast

1650F. (900C.)
16S0r. (900C.)

75,000
72,000

33.0
32.9

54.2
57.6

cooled
furnace cooled

(1), air

(1),

(900''C.) (1). furnace cooled

cooled
1650F. (900C.), furnace cooled

(1), air

0.41

furnace cooled

(6),

Annealed

0.32

0.37

(6),

Annealed
3.7''

(3), air

(1),

air

cooled;

1525''F.

cooled
(900C.)

(830<'C.)

0.84
0.71

commercial furnace

1475^. (800C.)

(1), air

0.26
0.27

of steel**

67,000
70,000

77,000
0.25

gation, tion of

35,000

0.22
0.22
0.22
0.24

per sq. in.

duc-

62,000
64,000
73.000

0.19

point, lb.

26,000
24.000
35,000
35,000

0.20
0.23
0.30

0.20- 0.70- 0.250.35


0.25
0.80

ElonYield

sq. in.

0.40

0.11

0.15
0.17
0.18

Re-

Man-

(1),

(1),

air

air

cooled;

cooled;

1000F.

1525''F.

(540C.)

cooled

.Annealed, furnace cooled

35. 5

1650F.

quenched;

water

(900C.)

1300F.

(705C.), furnace cooled

0.27
0.27
0.27
0.28

0.72
0.75
0.69
0.65

0.28

0.32
0.31
0.26
0.27

0.034
0.034
0.032
0.032

0.027
0.029
0.027
0.027

82,500
74,500
76,000
74 000

44.500
40 000
41,500
43,000

28.0
35.0
28.0
28.0

47.7
45.7
44.8
42.0

68,000

42,000

33.3

51.1

163B
153B
156B

16oOF. COOO-C.)
1650r. (gOO-C.)
1650F. (900C.)

(3), air

cooled

(3), air

cooled

(3), air

cooled

furnace
(840''C.)
1550F.
(7),
lOOO-F. (540C.) air cooled
37.5'

1650F. (900C.)

cooled

furnace cooled
cooled
(1). air cooled
(1), air cooled
(1), air

43 500

37.8

63.3

75,000
76,000
84 000

36,000
42,000
57,000

19.5
25.5
30.0

29.0
31.5
65.0

156B
143B
160B

95,000

68,000

24.0

57.0

192B

1650F. (900C.) water quenched,


1300F. (705C.), air cooled
1650F. (900C.), water quenched,

220B

1100F. (595''C.) air cooled


1650F. (900C.), water quenched,

108,000

79,000

19.0

46.0

45.5'

119,000

90,000

14.0

33.0

238B

130,000

100,000

9.0

18.0

250B

to

(1),

1700F. (930C.)
1600F. (870C.)
1200F. (650C.)

69,000

0.79

As cast
Annealed

900F. (480C.), air cooled


1650F. (900C.), water quenched,
700F. (370C.), air cooled
1650F. (900C.), water quenched,
oOOF. (260C.), air cooled

drawn
drawn
drawn
drawn
drawn

MATERIALS
CAST CARBON STEELS
Chemical composition

(Conlinued)

41

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

42

HIGH ALLOY CAST STEELS


Manganese
1.

2.
3.

4.
5.

Steel.

Contains 10 to 14 per cent manganese with less than 1.5 per cent carbon.
Extremely hard, strong, and tough, with high resistance to wear.
Usually cast to form, but can be forged at a yellow heat.
Difficult to machine, can be partly softened by quenching from about 1830F.
Hardness is restored by heating to about 1380F. and coohng slowly in air.

Nickel Steel.
1.

2.
3.

Contains ordinarily 0.52 to 3 per cent nickel with 0.15 to 0.60 per cent carbon.
Has high elastic limit and tensUe strength.
Corrosion resistance increases mth the nickel content.

Chrome
1.

Steel.

Contains usually 0.5 to 3.5 per cent of chromium with 0.2 to 0.6 per cent
carbon.

2.

Has high

3.

Up

to

elastic limit, tensile strength,

per cent of

chromium has

and hardness.
on steel.

httle effect

With

per cent car-

5.

bon and 2 per cent chromium, great toughness is attained.


Low-carbon chrome steels can be forged with as high as 12 per cent chromium
present, but the alloy becomes brittle as the carbon increases.
Chrome steel attains great hardness when quenched in water.

6.

Steels with

4.

Vanadium
1.

about 15 per cent chromium are relatively corrosion

resistant.

Steel.

Small percentages of vanadium combined with chromium and manganese in


an alloy that has high tensUe strength and elastic hmit.
Vanadium makes nickel steel more homogeneous and decreases the fragility;
it is seldom used with more than 8 per cent nickel.
Additions of 0.15 to 0.25 per cent vanadium to chrome steel counterbalances
the extreme hardness of chromium and produces an alloy with better machinsteel result in

2.

3.

ing properties.

Tungsten
1.

2.

3.

4.
5.

Steel.

very hard and brittle, difficult to forge, and cannot be welded when the
tungsten exceeds 2 per cent.
Can be worked at a red heat, but is usually cast in the form of tools and ground
to the desired form.
Addition of tungsten to steel produces a close and uniform structure.
High-carbon tungsten steel retains high magnetism.
Steel alloys with 5 to 8 per cent tungsten are self-hardening.
Is

MATERIALS
Molybdenum
1.

2.

43

Steel.

molybdenum on steel is between that of tungsten and chromium.


Molybdenum in chrome steel improves the forging qualities.

Effect of

High-speed Steels.
1

Derive their properties from selected combinations of the several metals listed
above.

2.
3.

Cobalt, uranium, titanium, and silver are also used in high-speed steels.
typical high-speed steel analysis is iron, 68.79 per cent; carbon, 0.51;
manganese, 0.26; silicon, 0.14; phosphorus, 0.02; sulphur, 0.04; chromium,
7.08; tungsten, 22.68; and molybdenum, 0.48 per cent.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

44

oo
ooo
0(N0
oo
oo c c
c:

^ s s
o3

oooo
OO
lOiO
0-T3

(NX!

S S1.2
S ^=^c^
cs;:i3;:i5

>

-^^
uO
d d
lO

13

S
t,

t-

O O O
lO
Is.

^C iQ O
'O o
if3

fc-

oo
oo

OOO
OOO 0T30
^-

d d

c c c
? s &
d d d

d d

"OTSt^

oo"o
OOO

o'c'c'-rtO"'

ooo

ocDiraoo OO
1

-o22
c s
C C
^ I- C
o o c o o
<1J

1-.

12:

1-.

3l5'd

C OJ OJ
(- d d
o c c

d d
d d d
G _g S S
=^
o o
o o o
,

--;

d d

t-

COO

Ur

c^i

0.2 c.s

o
a
<!

w
CO
-9!

<
m
w
w
H
w
H
m
<!
o
l>l

o
ij
<!
I

S;

per

in.
Yield point,

lb. Bq.

=*

o o

-O'OOO OOO

b
^

I-

fii

t-

O O O G o c o

d d

zzz< Z<Z

W c c c
d k. k. L.
c o o o

2i

esg.
O 0--

ZZO

<

OOOO OOO

<o

-O
OM

00

Ol (M

p<

33

-:^'^

-'rt'^'d

(N-H-

(MIM

T3-d

ea

i?;^:?:^

lOOWXO OOO

O'-

TJ'q

OOO
OOO g2
oooo

:;-d;r;t3

-M-M-

c E S
^ 3 cS

fc-

CO COCO

OOOOOO OOO
1-0

OOOoo

rot-co

CO

OOO

Tf C5 oo

O t^ '-'-- 03 lO

'^ClOOOiO'-'

(N (N

OCJ

OOO oo

i-H I-.

c^

,-.

-rf

O 00 * QO

t-h

--I

(M

OOiOWOiOOO

O'COt*

OOiO

2;o

15

MATERIALS

45

C3

9
S C
oj ^

OO
oc

5:
c3

-13

T3 (M lO
O
in CiOcD"^
---

c;

fu

OO

S S S

c;

-^

S^

0)

O O O O O

o o

r
O

o o lo
o
OClOfN

(NO

-^

-,

oj

a,

H
Pi
a
(^
o

qJ

Pi

Q
<
m
CO
(H

<
a!

CO

H
M
H
w

? S

'^

2S.S

>^

"

eel
o d

9!

3 " g

<

"

D,

a-'

OS.

o b

m m o

N_N N N

w
m

b:

ooooo

cow

coo

a o

46

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


PROPERTIES OF CORROSION- AND HEAT-

MATERIALS
RESISTANT CAST STEELS
CoeflBcient of

thermal expansion

47

48

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


PROPERTIES OF CORROSION- AND HEAT-

MATERIALS
RESISTANT CAST STEELS

(Continued)

49

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

50

PROPERTIES OF
AUoy

STAINLESS STEEL

U.S.S.

U.S.S. stabihzed 18-8

U.S.S. 18-8

Typical chemical composition

Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus

Type 302*

Type 304

Type 321

Type 347

08/20
1 .25 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.75 max.
18.0/20.0
8.0/10.0

0.08 max.
2.00 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.75 max.
18.0/20.0
8.0/10.0

0.10 max.
2.00 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.75 max.
17.0/20.0
7.0/10.0
4 X C min.

2.00 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
.75 max.
17.0/20.0
8.0/12.0

Sulphur
Silicon

Chroniium
Nickel

Titanium

Columbium

10 max.

10

X C

Physical properties

Microhms per

cc

Microhms per

cu. in

70 (cold worked,
70-82)
27.6 (cold worked.
27 6-32 3)
6.4
.

steel

Melting range, deg.

Low-carbon

0.286

0.286

Density. lb. per cu. in


Specific electrical resistance at 68r.:

1.00

Structure

6.5
2550-2590

2550-2590

Austenitic

Austenitic

Austenitic

003

003

10

10

ji

0.12

1.

1.1

113

33

9.6

9.3
10.3

Cold

Annealed

1.1

0.32
9.3
10.3

Cold

worked

Annealed

worked

105-300t
60-250
29- 26
50- 2
65- 30

80- 95
35- 45

105-300t
60-250
29- 26
50- 2
65- 30

80- 95
35- 45
55- 60
55- 65

105-300t
60-250
29- 26
50- 2
65- 30

80- 95
35- 45
29
55- 60
55- 65

75-110
35
135-185

90- 95
170-460

138-185

90- 95
170-460

45
135-185

B75-B90

C5-C47

B75-B90

C5-C47

B75-B90

153

10.2

worked

003
1.10
1

112

153

Annealed

=
=

0.12

0.32

0.

Cold

It

112

150

9.
10.

0.

150

003
1.10
1

1.1

0.

=
=

0.12
113

Mechanical properties at room


temperatures

28

2550-2590

=
=

B.t.u./sq. ft./hr./deg. F./in., at212r


Low-carbon steel = 1.00, at 100C.
B.t.u./sq. ft./hr./deg. F./in., at 932F
Coefficient of thermal expansion:
10 (32-212F.)
Per deg. F.
10 (32-932F.)
Per deg. F.

Austenitic

After 10 per cent reduction of area.


Specific heat:
B.t.u./deg. F./lb., at 32-212F
Low-carbon steel = 1.00 (0-100C.)..
Thermal conductivity:
.

71

71

2550-2590

Magnetic permeability;
As annealed
.

0.285

0.285

70 (cold worked,
70-82)
27 6 (cold worked,
27 6-32 3)
6.4

Cold

Annealed

worked

Tensile strength, 10^ lb. per sq. in


Yield point, 10' lb. per sq. in
Modulus of elasticity. 10^ lb. per sq. in
Elongation in 2 in., per cent
Reduction of area, per cent
Charpy impact strength, ft. -lb
Izod impact strength, ft. -lb
Endurance Umit (fatigue), 10 lb. per sq.

number
Rockwell hardness number

29

in.

Brinell hardness

_.

Stress causing 1 per cent elongation (creep)


in 10,000 hr.:
At 1000F., lb. per sq. in
At 1200F., lb. per sq. in
At 1350F., lb. per sq. in
At 1500F.. lb. per sq. in.
Scaling temperature, deg. F. (approx.)
Initial forging temperature, deg. F

Finishing temperature, deg.

35

and quench

and quench

Good

Good

Fair tough
Very good, anneal
heavier than J-s in.

Fair tough
Very good, not

mum

resistance

(A)

for

i-i
i-i

Hard
Hard
Hard

Full hard

=
=
=

125.000
150.000
175.000
185.000

lb.
lb.

lb.
lb.

per
per
per
per

sq.
sq.
sq.
sq.

in.
in.
in.
in.

105-300t
60-250
29- 26
50- 2
65- 30

45
135-185

90- 95
170-460

B75-B90

C5-C47

17,000
7,000
3,000
850
1.650
2.200
Not under
1600-1700
1900-2000F.
i

and quench
i

Good

[Fair tough
good,; not

Very

necessary to anneal

necessary to anneal

(B)

(B)

maximum corrosion resistance

U)

* U.S.S. 18-8 free machining. Type 303. same as 302 except S or Se 0.07 min. or
t Commercial grades, thin gages of sheet and strip

90- 95

170^60
C5-C47

17,000
7.000
3.000
850
1,650
2,200
Not under
1600-1700
1900-2000F.
and quench

Excellent
Cold forming, drawing, stamping
Fair tough
Machinability
Very good, anneal
Welding (arc. gas. resistance, atomic hydro.
after welding for maxigeK)
corrosion

Precautions (see notes)

80- 95
35- 45
29
50- 55
55- 65
77

75-110

17,000
7.000
3,000
850
1,650
2,200
Not under
1600-1700
1900-2000F.

.A.nneaUng treatment.

50- 55
55- 65
77

17,000
7.000
3.000
850
1,650
2.200
Not under
1600-1700
1900-2000F.

29

molybdenum

0.60 max.

MATERIALS
PROPERTIES OF
U.S.S. 18-8

Alloy

Typical chemical composition

Carbon
Manganese.

Chromium.

Nickel

U.S.S. 27

410J;

Type 430

Type 446

max.

0.20 max.
2.00 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.75 max.
22.0/26.0
12.0/14.0

max.
0.75 max.
03 max.
0.03 max.
0.75 max.
10.0/14.0

0.12 max.
0.75 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.75 max.
14.0/18.0

max.
1.00 max.
0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.75 max.
23.0/30.0

Molybdenum

U.S.S. 17

Type

0.03 max.
0.03 max.
0.75 max.
16.0/18.0
14.0 max.
2.00/3.00

Silicon

U.S.S. 12

Type 309

2 00 max.
.

U.S.S. 25-12

(Continued)

Type 316
0. 10

Phosphorus.
Sulphur

STAINLESS STEEL

U.S.S.

Mo

51

0. 15
.

0..35

Physical properties

0.283

0.291

per cu. in
Density,
Specific electrical resistance at 6S''F.:
Microhms per cc
Microhms per cu. in
Low-carbon steel = 1.00
lb.

72.3
28.5

0.276

78
30.7

2.273

57

0.270
67

59

Melting range, deg. F

2500-2550

2530-2570

22.4
5.2
2750-2790

23.2
5.4
2710-2750

2710-2750

Structure

Austenitic

Austenitic

Martensitic

Ferritic

Ferritic

Ferromagnetic
Ferromagnetic

Ferromagnetic
Ferromagnetic

Ferromagnetic
Ferromagnetic
0.11
1.0

7.1

Magnetic permeabihty:
As annealed

After 10 per cent reduction of area.


Specific heat:

fi

B.t.u./deg. F./lb. at 32-212F


Low-carbon steel = 1.00 (0-100C.)
Thermal conductivity:
B.t.u./sq. ft./hr./deg. F./in., at 212F
steel = 1.00, at 100C.
B.t.u./sq. ft./hr./deg. F./in., at932F
Coefficient of thermal expansion:
10= (32-212F.)
Per deg. F.
10= (32-932''F.)
Per deg. F.

Low-carbon

= 1.003

*i

0.12

0.11

0.11

1.1

1.1

i.d

1.0

Annealed

87-116
25-0 34

_.

90-110
40- 60
29

145

181

169

6.1
7.2

35- 50
45- 60

53
150-185

25,000
18,000
8,000
3,000

6.0
6.7

100-200
60-180

25- 10
65- 25

5.9
6.3

Cold
worked

Cold
Annealed worked

70- 90
40- 55

100-180
65- 30

75- 95
45- 60

29

29

29

25- 2
40- 20

30- 20
50- 40

85-175
55-155
29
25- 2
55- 25

185-270

50
140-185

150-250

30- 20
55- 40

100- 60

100-

8- 25

135-165

293-390

50
145-185

17,000
11,000
3,400
850

13,000
2,300
1,400

8,500
2,100
1,200

2200

2100
2150

1300
2100

1550
2000

Not under

Not under

mate)

1650

Anneahng treatment.

170-375

0.42

B75-B90 C5-C40 B80-B90 C5-C40 B75-B85 C30-C40 B80-B90 B90-B105 B80- 90

Stress causing 1 per cent elongation


(creep) in 10,000 hr.:
At 1000F., lb. per sq. in
At 1200F., lb. per sq. in
At 1350F.. lb. per sq. in
At 1500F., lb. per sq. in
Scahng temperature, deg. F. (approxi-

65- 85
35- 45
28
35- 25
65- 60

110-270
65-230
29- 26
25- 2
55- 20

6.1

169
0.49

QuenchCold
Cold
Annealed
worked
worked Annealed ed and Annealed

90- 95
43
135-185 170^60

temperature, deg.

0.50
199

8.3
9.6

80- 95 105-300t
35- 45 60-250
29- 26
29
50- 55 50- 2
55- 65 65- 30
70-110

number

Finishing temperature, deg.

173

125

drawn

Tensile strength, 10^ lb. per sq. in


Yield point, 10^ lb. per sq. in
Modulus of elasticity, 10= lb. per sq. in.
Elongation in 2 in., per cent
Reduction of area, per cent
Charpy impact strength, ft.-lb
Izod impact strength, ft.-lb
Endurance Umit (fatigue), 10=* lb. per sq.

Rockwell hardness number

1.003

0.12

8.4
9.6

Mechanical properties at room


temperatures

Initial forging

1^

1.10

108
0.31
145

X
X

Brinell hardness

= 1.003-

26.4

1600-1700
1950-2050F.

1600-1700
1950-2050F.

and quench

and quench

C0-C25

1,600
400

2100
2000

Not over

Not over 1450

Not over 1400

Furnace cool
from 1550-

Air cool from

Rapid cool from

1500-1400'F.

1650-1550F.

1400-1450

1100F. or air

Cold forming, dra\ving, stamping


Machinabihty
Welding (arc, gas, resistance, atomic
hydrogen)

Precautions (see notes)

Good

Good

Fair tough
Fair tough
Very good, anneal Very good, anneal
for

maximum

for

maximum

corrosion
resistance

corrosion
resistance

(A)

(-4)

cool from
1300-1400F.

Fair
Fair
Fair

Welding hardens
Anneal to restore
ductiUty
(C)

Good

Poor
Fair
Fair

Fair
Fair

Welds

are brittle
when cold

Welds

are brittle
cold

when

Shght response

Shght response

to anneal

to anneal
(-D)

(fl)

X U.S.S. 12 free machining, Type 416, same as 410 except S or Se 0.07 min. or molybdenum 0.60 max.
{A) Preheat slowly to 1600F.. then heat rapidly to the forging or annealing temperature.
Exposure to temperatures between 800 to
1600F. produces marked susceptibihty to intergranular corrosion.
If the metal is unattached, this can be cured by repeating the anneahng
treatment.
{B) For maximum corrosion resistance in high temperature ser\dce, use following stress reheving operations
heat 2 hr. at 1550F..

air cool.

(C) Preheat slowly to 1450F., then heat rapidly to 2100F. for forging.
Full corrosion resistance is developed only in the heat-treated
condition.
(Temper below 1000F.)
(D) In forging, preheat slowly to 1450F. Excessive grain growth takes place above 2000F. Expert welding is required to avoid
excessive grain growth.
Prolonged exposure at 850 to 950r. produces cold brittleness. To prevent this, heat to 1650 to 1550F. before
cooling, and quench.
Stainless steels cannot be forge hammer welded.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

52

COMPOSITION AND PROPERTIES OF IRON-NICKEL-CHROMIUM ALLOYS


Group

composition of
each type, per cent

classification, typical

MATERIALS
CHARACTERISTICS AND USES OF IRON-NICKEL-CHROMIUM ALLOYS

53

54

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

MATERIALS

CO

N
O
m
Q
fe
<!

CO
1^
CO
CO

m
H
w
o
t)
o
o
I

H
ft

O
ft

O
fe
<!

fe

O
1
H
w
O
ft

o
o

55

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

56

J^

ft
ft
03

ft

ft
ft

to

C
o3

N
a
o
Pi
n
Q
B
<!
CO

w
<:
Pi

n
H
W
O
o
pel

1^

o
w
W
O
s
<;

w
u
H
M
(

1^

H
O
<5
Oi

<
w

MATERIALS
o o

rf

c3

CO

bC 'm

"o -^ ^.
-*J

CD

bC
Ml

d 3 C

bC

03

'El

o3

tT g" bC

ft P-

CO

o3

CO

"

ft

C E C
P.

CD

Ji

IB

03

a;

j3
bO
-

f_
cu

&

ft

M
P4
N

'J

Q
<:

w
CO
m

n
H
W
o
o
O
CO

t>

O
<;

w
o
I

H
CO

W
H
O
<!

<
K
o

-^

.2
bD

a1

^ g
" I

S3

"^

C3

'"

-a

CD

ft

CO

-.-I

5-^

^2

""

1^

CD

.t

CO

'-3

o
Pi
pq

-^

CD

C d

'i'

S
OJ

^
m

a3

'S

.S

QJ
CD
ti

CC

57

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

58

CORROSION-RESISTING

Metal or
alloy

MATERIALS
METALS AND ALLOYS

59

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DE^IUN

60

--

(1)

^t3 d

ri

+j""'

go

u.

d-^o o

CO

gigs'

O
aces
W 0) g

<:

<
n

C3
.^
<!

^ ^o
'

cr

'1'

[fl

H
m
<!
o
a
a
<j

H
o
o

^gsi

o
t

ma

P<
P4
P<

O
Pi
P<

Q
Z
<

OS

o
H
CO
O

Oh

HZ

a;

MATERIALS
7*

'

M"

".M

2S

-^Sq6
r^
fc,

"

J3

CT

- - Q

(u

c 9'kc

Cgv
"-f^'a

O"

h-l

<!

W
w

c^

<!
pq
I

<
H
W
!
O
Q
a

>-,

"^ +; _;

'"

bD

&'"

H
w
o
O
o
tn

W
H
W
O

cd
Ph

Q
<

o
O
O

do

30J.2

HZ

??

61

62

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


s

a^

to
><

o
<!

a
<
n

4
-J!

H
W
-U
o
Q
<!

H
W
O
t)
o
o
w
M
CO
t>

<
CO

o
I
H
CO

W
H
O
^

MATERIALS

a
p

63

ft-"!
aj

tH

o T

fl)

O S
'43

-d

*^^

s
s

2
O)

to

O
<
w

5
<
H
<
u
O
<!

O
t>
O
o
tn

m
Q
<

O
H
en
H
O

:3
'

o
o

ft

-^

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

64

CAST AND
A.S.T.M.

WROUGHT MAGNESIUM -BASE ALLOYS

MATERIALS

65

PROPERTIES OF INSULATING MATERIALS


Properties

Power

Hard rubber

Vulcanized fiber

Laminated phenolic

0.01-0.03

0.05

0.03-0.07

2.7-4.0

4.5-6

factor, at radio frequencies

Dielectric constant,

at radio fre-

quencies
strength (specimen l-s
Step by step test at
thick.

Dielectric
in.

25-250 volts per mil

500-1,000 volts per mil


3,000-5,000 lb. per sq. in.

25C.)
Tensile strength
Water absorption, per cent in 24 hr.

9.000-16,000

150-600 volts per mil


6,000-20,000 lb. per sq. in.

in.

0.3-2.5
1.3-1.4

20-60
1.2-1.4

0.02
1.2-1.5

Specific gravity

per sq.

lb.

Coefficient of linear expansion, per


deg.

60-80

10^6

25

Effect of aging

Deteriorates slowly unless well


vulcanized and protected from

Effect of heat

Softens

10-G

20-30

Improves

Improves

Will not melt; not readily inflammable, but chars and becomes
brittle
at high temperature.

Not

10-

light

at

50 to 65*C.

Melts

at 200C.

Burns at about 340C.

Tem-

readily inflammable.

peratures from BO-ISO^C. tend


to renew chemical reactions,
resulting in shrinkage and loss
in weight

Effect of sunlight.

Discolors and disintegrates after

No

effect

No

No

data

Lowers surface

visible effect

Sulphate films
a few months.
formed on surface reduce surface resistivity

Effect of ultraviolet light.

few hours exposure

is

in its

resistivity

equivalent
to
many
months exposure to sunlight

effects

Effect of moist air.

Effect of steam.

No

Absorbs water freely but without


permanent injury; while saturated it becomes soft and flexible
and swells; warps and twists

effect

The only

effect is that resulting

from^ the high temperature

upon drying
Same as above, except
is

absorptirfm

more rapid

Absorbs shght amount

of water,

reducing dielectric properties

Best grades not affected beyond


slight absorption of moisture
after a few days in steam the
cheaper grades will swell appresuperheated
ciably and split
steam tends to warp and blister
all grades
;

Solvents.

Affected by most organic solvents


and mineral oils; unaffected by
alkalies,

Metallic inserts.

Machining quahties

weak

acids,

and certain

concentrated acids
Hard rubber is rapidly deteriorated by contact with iron or
copper, the metals themselves
Inserts should
also corroding.
be coated with tin, paper, unvulcanized rubber, or other mutually protecting medium^
of a high-polish but machines less accurately than would
be supposed, because of its great

Admits

has tendency to
warp, can be molded but not ac-

resiliency.

It

curately to size

Organic solvents have no permanent effect; oils are sUghtly absorbed; affected

by

acids and

oils,

by
or

most

weak

organic

acids; at-

tacked by alkahes and strong

No

effect

Admits

affected

solvents,

acids

alkalies

No

Not

of

fine

may Admits

drilled,

of a good pohsh; can be


sawed, punched, drilled, stamped,

turned,

turned,

planed,

bossed,

milled,

finish;

be sawed, punched,
embossed,
stamped,
planed, bent, tapped

effect

knurled,

tapped

emeither

with or against the grain, though


not so easily as hard rubber and
vulcanized fiber

66

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

MATERIALS
Q S

67

68

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

MECHANICAL AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF PHENOLIC LAMINATED MOLDED MATERIALS

MATERIALS
CHARACTERISTICS AND USES OF PHENOLIC LAMINATED MOLDED MATERIALS

69

70

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

CHAPTER

III

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES


Page

Paqe

Stress

Calculations

for

Thin

72
72
75
75

Sheet Sections

Compression Members
Angles in Compression
Shear Members
Vertical

Stiff eners

for

Webs
Diagonal Tension

Hollow Girders

Aluminum

Shear

Resisting

77

Webs

Box

80

Sections Subjected to Torsion

Chart for Determining Bending Moments.


Deflection of Variously

Loaded Beams

Beams
Tensile Strength of Round Wires
Rectangular Moments of Inertia
Stresses in Cantilever

77

71

85
.

90
91

92
93
94

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN,

72

Aluminum Sheet Sections

Stress Calculations for Thin

A condensation of the article by the same title by S. A. Kilpatrick and 0.


Company, in Product Engineering, February, March, April, and May, 1936.

J. Schaefer, of

The Glenn L. Martin

COMPRESSION MEMBERS
By the method presented here, compression members made of formed ahiminum sheet for
shapes as shown in the table below can be calculated for any length of member and any thickness
pf sheet.

L =

length of the column, in

in.

thickness of the sheet, in

=
K =

ultimate compressive stress of material,


generally taken as yield point

radius of gyration
in.

^ =

modulus

=
C =

10,500,000 for 24

shape factor at given L/p


shape factor for short columns at about

L/p = 20

P/A =

allowable stress, in

lb.

per sq.

In the preceding equation,

ST aluminum

end
Rankine formula

coefficient for

failing stress

by the

in.

of elasticity

restraint,

load at failure divided

section area

r^
l+B
/

as in the

'

(1)

'

(2)

For compact

sections, tubing, corrugated sheet,

First, calculate a

/(I

+B

and the simplest

B)
+ B^

Apply the shape

from the equation.

sections, use

factor Ko, given in the

table, to the following equation

= 7C

("A"'

(3)

tanh {Kt)

(4)

Then,

J
tanh

(7

= hyperbohc

Note: In general, for sections having a high shape factor,


external dimensions.

If

the shape factor thus calculated

is

A",

less

tangent

the shape factor, will be inversely proportional to the


10, as would obtain if the external dimensions of

than

were doubled, the value calculated should be squared and the value of I- should be used in place of I in Eq. (4).
ample fixity along one edge as represented by the wood block or as obtainable by closely spaced stiffeners, the section should be calculated as a simple angle.
shape

If

section such as shape 3 does not have

As an example of the use of the table, a column of section similar to shape 2, shown
in the table, is to be designed to be made of 24 ST aluminum sheet 0.051 in. thick and
the length of the column is such that L/p is 50. The straight edges of the column are
restrained.

From
Ko =

12.

the table, for a short column of this section, for L/p less than 25, we get
The yield point of the material by test, or from figures given by material

manufacturer,
restraint

is

is 1.

50,000,

and

E =

10,500,000 for 24 ST.

The

coefficient of

end

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES

73

SHAPE FACTORS FOR FORMED ALUMINUM COMPRESSION MEMBERS


Shape

Material

Test

End

aluminum

i/p

condition

a, lb.

at test
test

\.- 0.025- 0.080

K-/5-

24ST

per

sq. in., at

L/p

Test, yield
point, lb.

per sq. in.

Flat

48.000

<25

Flat

59 800

<25

Flat

50,000

50,000

45,000

46 000

pitch

0.25

0.052

"^Ah

,TJ

Rivets spaced
at i"in double

"^

R=4i'

<

L=575

iO.J75"

row

Wood block
(not bearing at ends]
24ST
L=/0

U-lf-A
1
Y '2

0064 fo 0128
\KKIVt
Rivets

at

'pitcfi,

Woodblock

^^^Qg^red

(not bearing

=;

<N
,

(][)

at ends) ^

>

J
1

24ST

nc

'-r-

o/i

<^

X
i^-^to'

5c

Rivet at 2 "pitch

on

5a, b

~ ~ Stiorf blocks,
g

Sect

From
^ICO

"0.0/6

S^

5b

<25 on 5a
and 56

C^aandb

R (inside)

and c

gaps

15 to

70 on 5c

Flat on 5a
and 56

(a)

14.3

(a)

22.6

(6)

14.3
22.6

(a)

(6)

Knife on 5c

(c)

15.4 (at

(c)

14.5

(c)

L/p =

15)

(6)

(at
0)

52,000
52,000
55,000

L/p =

(a)
(6)
(c)

50,000
50,000
50,000

(avg.)

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

74

SHAPE FACTORS FOR FORMED ALUMINUM COMPRESSION MEMBERS


Shape

Material

Test

End

aluminum

L/p

condition

17ST

k1'^ r

-J

r*r*i

(Continued)

a, lb.

it at test

Ko

per

sq. in., at

test

Flat

L/p

Test, yield
point, lb.

per sq.

in.

43.000

40 000

30,000

44,000

'

K"H

V 5"/'

17ST

-Azr^'

Flat

23 at L/p
bb

19.0
at

L/p = 55

Vs- c//'am. liqhtening


" hole, pifch

2f

tiD4
jp-

Afeffective)=A

A= Area wiihout
D= Diam.

27-35

hole

hole; P=pi+ch

17 ST

35.4

Flat

17ST

Length =
24 in.

Flat

34,500

41,000

H"-t

/
''

^ holes
rivets,

P=/'

I Flat shee/ simply


[supported on edges

-\ W

_i
Bu reou

Ko

of S+ds. tesfs

K X 33
f

aMoTooo

V:32,000

2%/W

29.6*/"'

32,000

About
40,000

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES


Calculate

Use

in

Eq.

this value of

From Eq.

(2)

above, with

B to calculate

in

1.

Eq.

(1),

from which a = 22,700

lb.

per sq.

(3),

K
From Eq.

<r

C =

75

12

/50;000\ y2

17.8

\22, 700/

(4),

22,700 tanh (17.8

22,700

0.72

0.051)

16,200

lb.

per sq.

in.

ANGLES IN COMPRESSION
For angles, the following table gives the value
L/p

of a for different values of

L/p

in.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

76

Limitations of the equations


1. Valid only for panels subjected to pure shear load.
2. If /s exceeds the shear yield point of the material, shear yield point should be
taken as the critical stress. For 24 ST,' the shear yield point is 24,000 lb. per sq. in.

approximately.
3. The equation does not give dependable results for sheets less than about
0.032
I

in. thick.

njrr
-;

8
1

--,^^

4
3
2

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES


Therefore, since the appUed unit shearing stress of 10,900

the critical buckling stress of 11,250 lb. per sq. in., the

web

77
lb.

per sq.

in. is less

will carry

than

the 4,000-lb.

shear load without buckling.

VERTICAL STIFFENERS FOR SHEAR-RESISTING WEBS


An

approximate formula

for

computing the required moment

of inertia of the

stiffener is

2.29d

E =

For 24 ST aluminum,

Lt
where d
t

=
=

distance between

10,500,000, this equation

becomes

2.29d (
Yh
t
\3i6,
\3i6,500,000.

stiff eners

distance between centroids of upper and lower chords

thickness of stiffener
is to make the stiffener
by the above equation.

Note: Best practice

moment

(VhY

of inertia

thickness equal to that of the

web and then compute the required

DIAGONAL TENSION WEBS


To determine when

a web should be designed as a shear resisting web and when


it is to be designed to carry the shear load in diagonal tension, calculate 'SJV/h,
where V is the applied shear, in pounds, and h is the depth of the beam, in inches.
Usually,

if

member.

this ratio

ratio is 7, or nearly so,

which

than 7, the web should be designed as a diagonal tension


more than 7, a shear resisting web should be used. If the
both types of web members should be investigated to determine

is less

If this ratio is

the more economical.

is

The diagonal

tension stress St in a tension field

where h distance between centroids

For a = 45

of

ht sin

web

is

2a

upper and lower chords

deg.,

2V

Ot

ht

Theoretical
material.

mended

An

maximum

allowable St

is

equal to ultimate tensile strength of the

allowable St equal to about 0.7 ultimate tensile strength

for calculations.

Vertical Stiffeners

Compression load P' in the

stiffeners

can be determined from

P'= -(:^^)tana

is

recom-

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

78

For a

4,5

deg.,

tan a

1,

P'

Because the web

w
0.9

0,8

07
0.6

0.5

0.4

= - Vb
h

in diagonal tension tends to hold the stiff eners straight, prevent

bowing as a column, the stiff eners need not be


designed for the full column length, but only
to the equivalent column length as given by
the curve in Fig.

7.

The

design of a vertical

same as for any pin-ended


compression member.
Stiffeners must not be spaced farther
apart than one-half the depth of the beam.

stiffener is the

Chord Load

o
.i^O.3

At any point distant

A^

from the applied

load (Fig. 8), the total chord load


Ql

is

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES


For 24 ST, allowable

To

would be 0.7

stress

62,000

79

43,000

per sq.

lb.

in.

calculate lower chord:

where

M
/i

=
=

10,000

Area

35

V =

20

Maximum
A/r

,M_

10,000
-=

Hence compressive

= 31,300

^'

35

;^^:r

of compression chord is 0.719 sq. in.

-r

lO'OOO

^
1.
compression in lower chord

10,000

lb.

per sq.

22,500

stress

,,

lb.

developed

is

in.

Maximum allowable stress, as calculated for compression member


= 45,000, yield point of material, used in order to calculate crippling
=
K 10.8 (assumed)
= 0.125 in.
p =
0-

stress

-r
A

<r

=
=

tanh Kt

45,000 tanh (10.8


39,300 lb. per sq.

Hence, as this

is

0.125)

in.

greater than the 31,300

lb.

per sq.

in., stress

developed, the chord

is

safe.

To

calculate

upper chord:
, .

Maximum

Tension chord area

tension

d= -r

17,500

0.237 sq.

P ^
A

V =

5,000

35

10,000
-^

12,500

lb.

in.

12,500

237

Assuming 15 per cent reduction

10,000

-^

^^^r.^,^
52,700 lb. per sq. m.

in area

on account

of rivets,

tensile strength of 62,000 lb. per sq. in., the allowable stress will

0.85

62,000

52,700

lb.

per sq.

is

chord

is safe.

Stiffeners

Compression load by equation given above

a = 45

is

tan a

for

an ultimate

be

in.

not less than (and happens to be equal to) the actual

which

and

stress.

Hence tension

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

80

Stiffener load P' is therefore

P'

10,000

2,5001b.

20

= 0.173 sq. in.


P ^
~ -2,500 = 14,450

Stiffener area

lb.

per sq.

in.

0.173

0.25

From

the curve for equivalent column length (Fig. 7) for d/h

length will be 0.39 X 20 = 7.8 in.


Radius of gyration of stiffener

7.8

0.443

(7

K
t

=
=
=

p =
-T
A
=
=
=

0.25, equivalent

0.443
17.6

45,000
10 (assumed)
0.051
(T

in.

tanh Kt

45,000 tanh (10

0.051)

45,000 X 0.45
21,200 (approx.)

DESIGN OF HOLLOW GIRDERS


Symmetrical Pure Monocoque Sections
Guy

The derivations of the equations for unsymmetrical sections for semimonocoque structures were developed by
The Glenn L. Martin Company.

L. Bryan, Jr., of

In a monocoque structure, such as shown in Fig. 10, consisting of corrugated sheet


sections for upper and lower chord sections and thin
sheets for the web side skin, the maximum bending
moment stresses can be approximated closely by the
Transverse
frame

formula

Neutral

Jb

_My

f
X

(7)

-*

where
tnrizontal

^ reference
Fig.

10.

Symmetrical

monocoque structure

semi-

consisting of

corrugated-sheet chord sections, thin


web side skin, and transverse
frames.

M
y
7x

= applied bending moment


= distance from neutral axis to fibers in question
= moment of inertia of the cross section about

the

neutral axis.

In calculations for this type of section, the thin side


skin is neglected in all computations because it is
incapable of resisting much compression. The sheet simply dimples. Also, the error
resulting from ignoring the strength contributed by the portion of the side sheet in
tension

is

negligible.

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES


To

determine the location of the neutral

81

proceed in the conventional man-

axis,

ner, as follows

Divide the corrugated sheet chord sections, upper and lower, into convenient
short lengths L as indicated. L must be short enough so that the moment of inertia
of the section of length L, about its own neutral axis, will be small compared with its
moment of inertia about the neutral axis of the whole section of the structure.
2. Determine the areas A of the unit sections of length L, and locate the centroids
1.

or centers of gravity of these sections.

Choose any convenient horizontal reference line.


Determine the distance R from the centroids to the

3.
4.

arbitrarily chosen hori-

zontal reference hne.

Tabulate in adjacent columns the areas


and tabulate the products AR.

5.

with their corresponding R, and

calculate

AR

6.

Add

7.

Divide the summation of

all

the

values.

AR

values

by A, and the

result wdll

be D, which, as

indicated in the figure, locates the neutral axis.

To

calculate 7^, the

moment

of inertia, proceed as follows:

1. Determine and tabulate the y values, i.e., the distances from the centroid of
each short length element to the neutral axis. It is necessary to do this only for the
elements lying to one side of the axis of symmetrj-.
2. Tabulate in the adjacent column the square of each y value.
3. Multiply each elemental area A by the square of its centroid distance y.
4. Add the Ay'^ values.
5. Multiply this summation by two if the elemental areas on only one side of the
axis of symmetry have been tabulated.
6. The result 21,Ay'^ will be the moment of inertia I^ of the section about the

XX axis.
This method

moment

applicable only

is

normal to the neutral

is

when

the section

is

symmetrical and the bending

axis.

Unsymmetrical Pure Monocoque Sections

An

example

The

Fig. 11.

an unsymmetrical box beam is shown in the accompanying


stress at any point on the beam cross section can be expressed bj'

of

fiber

the equation
.

^''

{MyH - MJy)y

+ {MM + M,L)x
7j;^ip

...

^^^
.

XX and YY are any convenient set of rectangular axes passing through the centroid of the section,

which

is

located

by using the same method

as described above for

the symmetrical section.


Ix

and

ly are calculated

Ix being the

the

YY
M^
My

moment

by the same method

of inertia

about the

as used for the symmetrical section,

XX axis and ly the moment of inertia about

axis.
is

the component of the bending

is

the component of

moment

moment

perpendicular to the

perpendicular to

FF

axis.

XX axis.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

82

and My are obtained by resolving the applied bending moment, which


be at any angle to the XX axis, into its components about the XX axis and YY

M^

may
axis,

respectively.

H is the summation of the product of each elemental area times both of its coordiH = XAxy, the values of x and y being the distances from the centroid of
the elemental areas to the YY axis and XX axis, respectively. Distances above the
XX axis and distances to the right of the YY axis are positive. Distances below the
XX axis and distances to the left of the YY axis are negative. Hence XX and YY
are principal axes, H is equal to zero.
nates,

i.e.,

if

-^--0.05/--A
Corrugofiom\

-.
j

10

Horizon -tal
reference
12

'\I5

14

13

^'-Verfica/ reference

Fig.

11.-

-0. 032 "smoofh sheet


Unsymmetrical box beam.

the preceding equation, the normal stress /^ at any point in the cross secand YY are the principal
When is equal to zero, i.e.,
tion can be calculated.

From

XX

axes,

MyX

M,y

(9)

equal to zero and the section is synometrical about one axis, at


axis,
least, and the applied bending moment makes an angle of 90 deg. with the
and the reference axis is in the plane of the resulting bending moment.
Further,

if

is

XX

My
h =

(10)

As an example of the most general case of an unsymmetrical section such as


shown in the figure and with the apphed bending moment at an angle to the neutral
axis, assume that/b had been calculated from Eq. (8) and had been found to be
/

-1,0862/

For the elemental or elementary area 4


X
y

85x

(11)

in. Fig. 8,

= -54.43 + 38.27 = -16.16


= 31.63 - 6.81 = 24.82
= 25.57 measured to extreme fiber

of corrugation

from which
/,

= -1,086 X 25.57 - 85 X
= -27,770 - 1,370

= 29,140

lb.

per sq.

in.

16.16

compression

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES

83

Allowable Stresses for Chord Sections

For chord sections consisting of corrugated sheets, determine allowable stresses


The column length of the corrugations
as for columns as explained on pages 72-75.
transverse
frames of the semimonocoque conthe
between
distance
taken
as
the
is
The coefficient of end restraint C is taken equal to one in the usual construction.
struction.

If

the corrugations are covered with thin sheet, a value of

Smooth Skin with Reinforcing

C =

1.5 is used.

Stringers

foregoing equations cannot be used for calculating a semimonocoque strucApplication of the equation f^ = My/h would
ture with fore-and-aft stringers.
imply that the sheet and stringers were stressed the same. This is true only to the

The

point of loading where the sheet begins to buckle.

Beyond that
Y-r-

b=8J5

load, the sheet con-

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

84

(X

45,000
1.368

K =

?-

SsT

1.368

61,500

0.3682

504

41,000

13 (assumed)

41,000 tanh 13.6

20,200

0.040

Ji-

lb.

per sq.

in. stiff ener

allowable

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES


Allowable

j =

85

^^

= 8.35^?0.032 =

^'^^0

P^' ^^-

^^-

^^-

not be realized unless the rivets are spaced closely enough


between rivets. A rivet pitch not greater than forty
times the sheet thickness is suggested as a safe limit.
Neutral axis and moment of inertia of the section are calculated in the usual
manner except that a reduced area is used for the portion of the curved sheet which is
under compression.

This sheet value

will

so that the sheet cannot buclde

r^nc

i^nective area
where

D =

distance from

treme

sheet allowable

= A ..
X -r^
A

stmener allowable

neutral axis to

ex-

fiber of section

r-r

v^

distance from centroid of the portion of


sheet to neutral axis.

or

Use

\ \i

K calculates greater than one.

Because a sheet on the compression side is only partly effective, the neutral axis
below the center of the circular section (Fig. 12)
The error resulting

shifts to shghtly

therefrom

is

negligible.

For a bending moment of 3,300,000


compression in the

is

the preceding example, the

maximum

fibers is

,
jb

This

in. -lb. in

= -3,300,000X45.9
=
^^gQ

equal to the allowable

P/A

on
onn
20,200

ii

lb.

per sq. m.

calculated above hence


;

it is

satisfactory.

BOX SECTIONS SUBJECTED TO TORSION


Closed tubular or box sections are the most
For a single-cell thin- walled box,

efficient

and hence most generally

used.

f-

=
T =

where /s

where

8 =
G =

shearing stress, in

lb.

per sq.

applied torsional moment, in

in.

torsional

modulus

erally taken as

alloy

of elasticity, gen-

OAE

for

A =

in. lb.

deflection in radians per in. of length

aluminum

(12)

2-3i

J =

inclosed cross-sectional area in box, in sq. in.

thickness of skin or covering

torsion constant of the section

_ 1 t'
J ~ iA- J
1

ds
t

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

86

For the section

in Fig. 14,

ds

Si

Si

So

S2

El

ti

ts

14

(13)

When the sides of the box act

as tension field members, in the preceding equation


used should be five-eighths the actual thickness, which will give a
reasonably accurate value for 6, the angular deflection.
In the preceding equation for stress fs the torsional moment is assumed to be
applied so as to be distributed uniformly around the perimeter, an ideal condition
which is approached by placing bulkheads or ribs

for 6 the value of

at aU points of application of load so as to transfer

external loads directly to the walls of the box.

For a multiceU section such as the wing


section in Fig. 15 wherein sheets of different

thicknesses are used, and

h
Fig.

14.

the trailing edge

S2

Single-cell

thin-walled

box

Fig. 15.
Unsymmetrical box beam wherein
sheets of different thicknesses are used.

section.

portion which resists only a small part of the torque

T = 2{AJn
where

if

hi

shear factor, in
of

lb.

per

in. of

portion

perimeter bounding area

..4i

shear per inch of which

is

shear force, in
front spar

web

of the perimeter S4 is omitted,

i.e.,

given by
/13

hi

hi

Shear per inch of the three sides of thickness

wliere 63

lb.

hi

= ^[h^{Ai

= h{Ai

A.y

st/ti

ii, ^0,

A.^)

62

2K-Abs{Ai +

wherein
7

bi

01
Si

7-

Sj
i

;,

+r
U + T

^.3

AM

A'2bi

and

A\b2

s-^/U

Shear per inch for leading edge covering


ho

per

imeter, bounding area

but

not including front spar web

Note that the portion

(14)

^2/12)

/12

neglected,

is

A,) +Aobi]

is

in. of
yl 2

portion of per-

but not including

the front spar web, the

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES


The shearing stress /

in

any part

of the

box

is

87

shear per inch divided

by

thickness,

or

h
fs
t

When any of the sides buckle to form diagonal tension


assumed to make an angle of 45 deg., the tensUe stress St is

fields,

the wrinkles being

2/1

Torsional deflection in 6 radians per

in. of

length

is

T
GJ

(15)

where J is the torsion constant of the section corresponding to the moment of inertia I
as commonly used in the formulas for beams under flexure.
The equations for 6 and
for the shear loads per inch are strictly true only for shear resisting panels.

buckle to form diagonal tension

If sides

the values of t used in the equations for bi, fe,,


should be multiplied by H. That is, use Ht instead of t. But for the stress
calculations for fs and St, always use for t, the
However, if allowable buckling
actual thickness.

and

fields,

&3

compared with

stress of tension field sides is high

actual stress, the use of an effective thickness


te

= Ht

For reasonable

wiU not be accurate.

accuracy, proceed as follows:

Assume that the


buckling

is

torsional

moment

stresses
in. -lb.

50,000

and

is

torsional

in. -lb.

and the

120,000

deflections

moment

in. -lb.

in.-lb. for

stresses

and

Calculate aU

Then

calcu-

deflections under a load of 70,000

the section as a tension

and the

total applied

under a load of 50,000

as in a shear resisting section.

late stresses

causing

Add

field.

the

Fig.

16.

Front

and

rear

spars

are

designed to resist all the bending, whereas


the box is designed on the assumption that
it resists all the torsion.

deflections.

In a design as in Fig. 16, the front and rear spars are designed to resist all bending
whereas the box is assumed to resist all torsional moments. To accomphsh this, the
proportion of the total bending moment resisted by each spar is proportional to the
ratios of the

moments

of inertia of the respective spars, to the total

moment

of inertia.,

or

MEph
+ ErIr
MEJb
=
Eplp + ErIr

Mpi =

Mi

M = total applied bending moment

where
Mpi and Mri

(17)

Ef and Er = modulus

bending moments in front and


rear spars

(16)

Eplf

of elasticity of material

of the spars

If

and Ir

= moment

of inertia of front

rear spars

and

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

88

the front and rear spars are of the same material, Er = Ep, and cancel out.
In Fig. 16, E.A. is the center of resistance to bending, and in the figure
If

j^

^F ~r

The

(18)

J^R

and the locus of these points is called


The torsional moment apphed to the wdng is the load times the dis-

point E.A.

the elastic axis.

called the elastic center,

is

tance of the center of gravity of the load to the elastic axis, i.e. Pic a) in Fig. 16.
This will be the torsion that will be assumed resisted entirely by the box.
For two spars acting in bending and interconnected only by pin-ended ribs, the
load

P in Fig.

16 wdll be divided proportionally between the two spars, as foUows:

P..=^^
^2 =
The

(19)

(20)

moments wUl be

root bending

Mf, =
Muo_

P^-rL

(21)

= PrX

(22)

This proportioning of the loads applies also when the spars offer but little resistance
and the ribs are rigidly connected. If the spars have high torsional rigidity
or if a box as in Fig. 13 is formed, the distribution approaches that given by Eqs. (16)

to torsion

and

(17) for

Mr^ and

If all torsion

Af,.i.

about E.A.

interaction between spars.

The amount

resisted by the box in torsional shear, there is complete


no torsion is resisted by the box, the interaction is zero.
obtained from

is

If

of interaction is

C,

where

L =

total length of

= 1^*

uniform cross

(23)

Bo

= GJ when

section of box

Bo

total
of

of

torsional

spars have relatively

little

resistance to torsion

Ao

stiffness

two spars plus box

IfIr/{If

h),

if

is

same

for

both

spars

Generally for a stressed skin box, ratio C, is such that the moment would divide as
The difference
in Eqs. (16) and (17), for all points along the span except the root.
between the moment obtained by the two methods is

= Mp, - Mfi
MeR = Mr, - Mr,
M,.p

For any degree


spar

of interaction

Cr between

spars, the final

(24)
(25)

bending moment in each

is

M, = M,, Mr = Mr, -

Cr{Mf2 - Mf,)
Cr{Mr, - Mr,)

(26)
(27)

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES


Cr approximates 0.70 at wing root

Mf =
M =

for a trapezoidally loaded

0.7Mf,
0.7Mi

+ 0.3^^2
+ 0.3ilffl2

89

box wing,

for which,
(28)
(29)

On

the assumption that Cr increases hnearly from 0.70 at the root to 1.00 at 20
per cent of the half span of the wing, Eqs. (16) and (17) apply from the wing tip to

80 per cent of the


(27)

wiU apply,

way

mth

inboard, and from this point inward to the root, Eqs. (26) and
C^ varying from 1.0 at the 80 per cent distance to 0.7 at the root.

Allowable Stresses

These must be based on the combined shear stress and direct compressive stress.
In the accompanying Fig. 17, /, and/,, are the allowable compressive stress and allow-

1.0

.9

08

2 Q6

0.4

0.2

S -0.Z

4-

-0.4

J
"

-Q6
-0.8

-1.0

-1.2

Fig. 17.

The combined

and shear loads are obtained through the use of this curve plotted from
the equation 1 (fca/fc) = (fsa/fsV-

stresse.s for axial

able shear stress, each acting alone.

When shear

stress oif.a is acting together with a


compressive or tensUe stress, f^a will be the allowable tensile or compressive stress.
Similarly, f^a will be the allowable shear stress when a compressive stress of f^a is
present.
By means of the curve in Fig. 17, the allowable /,<, andf.a are readily obtained
This applies for curved sheet, flat sheet, or tubes and may be used for
for any ratio.
combined bending and torsion or shear combined with axial tension or compression.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


CHART FOR DETERMINING BENDING MOMENTS

90

Various Conditions of Loading

Y"^
>i
^

'^

-12

100,00090,00080,000
70,00060,000

50,000

d^

Y"""'"'"'^'''^

'-

7~l

''"r

30,000
20,000

P^-2 -^

7-

,-rrr7777Z^
C
'

kL-iz

10,000

9,000
8,000
7,000
6,000
5,000

3,000

4,000

2,000

-n

2rL-H

with concentrated
load P= 2,000 lb.

Load increasing to one end

atend.L=50in.
C=l

Load increasing to center


Load

at center, supp. and fixed

Example
Cantilever beam

rj

P
2

-30

-40
-50
-60

-80
- 100

ends

Load at center, supported ends


Load increasing to

j^Q

200

fixed end

svrr.metrical and equal loads

300

i,,/iij,,j,iii...ii.^

-20
ends

Uniform load,supported ends

^
6----B=22Z^2&^

40,000-

center, fixed

Uniform load, supp. and fixed ends

III

4.

load. Fixed

Load of

i>>""ii^/i//i,/,,M

'"

ends

Uniform

Uniform

load, one fixed

end
^--

Two symmetrical and cquol

-| Concentroted

loads

load at free en^

Turning scale

400
-500

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES

91

DEFLECTION OF VARIOUSLY LOADED BEAMS


(steel). For other
material, multiply the answer
determined on chart by ratio,

E= 27,000,000

60

0.3-

iConc. load

50

a+ free end

E for steel

E for given material


40
increasinq uniformly fo free end

35

20,000 -|

15,00030

Uniformly dislributed

loc

25

'

|llllllllll

D(max)
Cone, load at end

0.1-

wr

Xl2

20

0.090.08-

Increosing uniformly to fixed

0.07-

end

15

-I

/D

0.06-

3conc. loods equolly spaced


0.05-

Uniformly disfribu+ed load

0.001

0.04^

0002

Concen+rofed Ipod of center

0004 0.006

Increasing uniformly to center


dJ

^^-

^^D

Uniformly distributed lood


D

Increosing uniformly to one end

QOI-

Decreasing uniformly to center


,D

0.009-

0.0081.5

Q007-

Concentrated load at cenif r

0.006-

0005-

Uniformly distributed load


D
I

0.9-

0.004-

Concentrated load at center

0.8

0.7-

0003

00025-

Uniformly distributed load

0.6-

0.5-

92

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


STRESSES IN CANTILEVER BEAMS
0.07

0.05

BEAMS AND STRUCTURES

93

TENSILE STRENGTH OF ROUND WIRES


0.10-

-200

0.09-

300

-400

500

- 600

700

80.0

900

1,000

-1,100

-150
0.02-

- 1,200

0.01-

The doffed Ifne shows fhafa wire 0.072" diamefer made


of mo ferial having an ulfimafe sfrengfh of 160, 000 lb.
per sq. in. breaks of 7331b.
Nofe fhaf fhe corresponding scales A and k^ or B 0770'

1300
-200
1,400

94

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


RECTANGULAR MOMENTS OF INERTIA AND SECTION MODULI

CHAPTER

LATCHES, LOCKS,

IV

AND FASTENINGS

Typical methods of temporarily retaining, locking, or fastening one movable


machine part with reference to another, including detents, snap rings, wire locks, and
taper pins.
Designs of indexing mechanisms, machine clamping methods and
23 examples of door and cover fastenings, all taken from actual designs, are included.
A chart for computing bolt stress is given at the end of the chapter.
Page

Locking Devices
Retaining and Locking Detents
Wire Locks and Snap Rings
Taper-Pin Applications
Hinges and Pivots

Page

Clamping Shoes and Plugs


Lock Bolts and Indexing Mechanisms
Machine Clamps
Door and Cover Fastenings
Bolt Diameter, Load, and Stress

96
100
103
104
105

95

109
Ill

115

116
119

96

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS


I

97

Special faced nuf requires


^ revo/ufion for locking

Tapered nui splif


for locking

Formed
flat

sfock

li^fej

Threaded rod posiHoned


by two opposite nufs

V///J
Fig. 33

Projections

Fig. 34.

Fig. 35

on washers of various

shapes /oc/< in hole

and against bolt

\^'" Lead or soff

~WM

_lii'x'L!il

Ip-.
-'

Fig. 36.

_<

brass washer

forms

lock^

against
leakage

oil

Fig. 37.

Fig. 38.

Key machined

from flat stock,


^

Spring
actuated

m rod

Spun-over
hole retains
spring lock

plunger

cup
washer
Loose pin
Fig. 39.

Fig. 40.

Fig. 41.

Fig. 42.

Internal V groove

Lower
I
I

with

face of nut milled

six

grooves
Two-piece ring fitting
against s ha fr shoulder
is retained in external

Pins with
beveled <.

ends

Six

In

locking positions'

one revolution

'Hump on washer
(washer spring-loaded)

recess

Cone-pointed screw actuafes


pins

Fig. 43.

Fig. 44.

\\

Fig. 45.

Retainer for

anchor pin

Extension

spring

Threaded collar has milled


is retained by cotter pin^

Flat spring.

Plunger^

slots;

:h

Fig. 46.

Fig. 47.

Fig. 48.

-i

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

98

Sliding rod^

Fla-i spring

Hex.nui

JZkL
Flaf spring'
with formed
iiump

Locaiing

--'

plunger,
spring- loaded

"'
^Drilled hole in
<-V

{_

Fig. 51.

Fig. 50.

Fig. 49.

V^

tSnap ring

nuf

-Counfer-

bored

or half-round

hole

Formed

Headless screw refainer^

wire wifh pin

end

Fig. 53.

Fig. 52.

Fig. 54.

Flaf spring wifh rounded

head refains pin

Wedge,

'

---

Clamped

Clomped projecfion-p
Toper pin

'Hollow head fillisfer screw


engages groove in wedge
Fig. 56.

Fig. 55.

Fig. 59.
Figs. 59-62.

Fig. 60.

Round bars

Fig. 61.

Fig. 57.

Fig. 62.

Fig. 58.

Fig. 63.

Soft

flexible

wire that

be held singh' or in multiple with one- or


two-piece formed plugs and clamped either with screw or nut and washer.
Clamping plugs may be reamed in place for accurate contact with round

withstands twisting

offers

cient retention of
or drilled screws.

either

pieces.

method used extensively

raajf

This

mobile rear-axle design.

an

effi-

slotted

shows a
in

auto-

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS

99

^^ leodeg.

furn opens
va/ve

Tooihed
wedges

Si-eel

Board

wedge

-'

/Special wedge- headed


/ screw cfamps shafts

Spring-backed

y plug

Screw

Serraled head
on screw

'Shaff locked agains'f'

endwise mol'/on
Fig. 67.

in

hammer

Fig. 66.

Fig. 65.

Fig. 64.

drop

Fig. 68.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

100

RETAINING AND LOCKING DETENTS


Knurled

Fig.

75. In

this design, the

plunger is retained by staking or spinning


over the hole

riving
Fig. 69.
plunger, shown in engagement at A, is pulled
out and given a 90-deg.
slipping into
turn, pin
the shallow groove as
shown at B, both members

fngoped
posiljon

Fig. 72.
The plunger is pinned to the knurled
handle, which is pulled out and twisted, the screw
A dropping into the locked position at
in the

at A.

bayonet

slot.

being thus disengaged.

fWVWHTJ^
ss[

70.The

pin in the
attached to the
plunger rides on the end
of the handle when in the
disengaged position and
drops into the hole Y to
allow engagement.
Fig.

collar

Fig. 73.
In this design, the
pin A engaging in the slot prevents
This
the plunger from turning.
detent is used as a temporary
gear lock which is engaged for
loosening a drawback rod through
the gear.

hand

Fig.

Fig. 71.
A long and a
slotted pin driven
into the casting give two
S'hort

plunger positions.

An adjustable gear-case
Fig. 74.
If the door is pushed
cover lock.
shut, it is automatically latched,
whereas pulling out the knurled knob
A disengages the latch.

76.The end

of the
plunger B bearing against
the hand lever A is concaved
and prevented from turning
by the dog-point setscrew
engaging the splined slot.
Friction is the only thing
that holds the adjustable

Fig.

ball

lever

77.

in position.

spring-backed steel

makes an inexpensive but

effi-

cient detent, the grooves in the rod


having a long, easy riding angle.

For economy, rejected or undersized balls can be purchased from


manufacturers.

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS

101

Another form, in
Fig. 78.
which the grooves are cut all
around the rod, which is then
free to turn to any position.

Fig. 82.
ball,

Instead

of

a hollow plunger

is

accommodates the spring.


The
used

which

end

hemispherical.

is

84.
Fig.
The plunger is
turned down slightly smaller
than the inside diameter of the

Fig. 79.
Fig. 80.
Figs. 79 and 80.
A double-locking
device for gear-shift j'oke rods is
shown in Fig. 79. At A, the neutral
position is shown with ball
free in
the hole. At B, the lower rod is
shifted; ball
is forced upward, the
upper rod being retained in a neutral

At A is shown the usual 120-deg.


Fig. 83.
conical spot made with a drill.
At B is shown a
90-deg. spot which gives a more positive seat,
one which will not permit the plunger to disengage as readily and which is preferable when
considerable vibration is encountered.

Fig. 85.
Instead of a hole,
a slot is milled across the rod.
Since the plunger is conical, it
is obvious that only line contact is obtained.

spring which gets its other bearing against the threaded plug,
the hole in the plug guiding the
stem of the plunger.

The lower rod must also


be in neutral position before the upper
rod can be moved. A similar design
is shown in Fig. 80, wherein a rod with
hemispherical ends is used in place of
position.

ball

X.

Fig. 81.
Without using a spring of any
kind, three gear-shifting rods are locked by a
large steel ball.
At A, the neutral position

At B, the lower rod has been


shifted, forcing the ball upward, thereby
locking the other two rods.
The dashed
circle shows the position of the ball when
is

shown.

the right-hand rod has been shifted.

Fig. 86.
The spring tension may be increased
or decreased as desired by the long hollow threaded
plug, which is then locked in position b^- means of
In this design, the rod is flattened
the check nut.
and the locating holes, which are truncated cones
in shape, are machined into the flat surface.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

102

Fig. 87.
The round plunger is flat milled to a
90-deg. included angle and prevented from turning
by pin A engaging milled slots in the threaded plug.
In the end view shown at B, it can be seen that, if
the spring tension is to be adjusted, at least a half
turn must be given so that the flattened point will
coincide with the slot in the rod.

Sometimes the plunger can


Fig. 90.
be milled with a flat which bears against
a pin, as shown in the end view to the
right thus the plunger is prevented from
turning in the hole. This design is par;

Fig.
88. When the
plunger diameter and the
wall thickness are sufficiently large,

Fig. 91.

plunger

keyway

can be milled into the


plunger for engaging a
pin, which prevents it
from rotating.

Here

with

shown a square-headed
body turned round to

is

its

accommodate the spring

in an eccentric hole,
thereby giving a support to the pin A, which

acts as a key.

ticular!}' suitable for solid-type plungers.

The plunger is milled


Fig. 89.
square with round corners and
the hole is partly broached; this
does awaj' with the necessity of
a key. The point is flat milled.

F I G. 92. Probably
one of the simplest yet
most

highly efficient
forms
of
detent
is
merely a flat spring
bent to a 90-deg. included angle and seating in V's milled in the
rod.

With a long spring and a fairlj'


Fig. 93.
short phmger, a common flat-head wire nail
can be used to support the spring against buckling.
The spring also fits closely into the
plunger hole to gain support, and the plunger
is flanged at its upper end to prevent its slipping
through the hole.

Fig. 94.
This design is similar to Fig. 88. When confined to a
small diameter, a smaller spring is placed within the larger. By
using a ,?i6 in. outside diameter outer spring, 25 per cent spring
tension can be gained by the addition of the inner spring. The
larger one has a sliding fit in the plunger and screw plug holes.
Two guide pins, the heads fittings closely into the larger spring, keep
the inner spring central and free from buckling.

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS

103

WIRE LOCKS AND SNAP RINGS


Re mo val^
fool
_

'

Wi're lock

"Close
--Kifi

wound spring,

successive coils cut


off fo suif

(exaggera led)

J^~~Lap should have


^in. for each jg in.
wire lock diameler

smaller Ihon

is

diameler

D, Fig

96

-Spring lock
of -In. wire

on^-in. diarn.

pin

Fig. 100.

, L

ubricafor

~Wire lock holds


fell and also
wire screen in
place

Fig. 102.

Fig. 101.

Wire lock,

Close-wound spring
from which infernal
lock n'ngs can be cuf

Wire lock

Shouldbe

^ In. larger
ihon diarn.
D,Fig. 96

^~2 in. for each dif'

ference befween
wire lock diom.
and diarn. D,
Fig. 96

Fig. 105.

Fig. 104.

Fig. 103.

Recfangular^

snap ring

'Machined
'Recfangular
snap rings

--Wire lock
holds sheef-

made from

mefal sfamp''ng

Fig. 106.

recfangular

in place

spring sfock
Fig. 107.

Groove moch_
Inedin ouler
race

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

104

TAPER-PIN APPLICATIONS

Fig. 109.
Fig. 109.

Fig. 110.

The conventional way of applying a taper

Fig. 111.
pin,

Fig. 112.

which depends upon

friction to hold the pin in place.

In gear boxes and other sealed mechanisms where it would be injurious for a pin to work loose, positive locking means
must be provided.
Fig. 110.
The large end of the pin comes just below the surface of the external member it is holding and is
staked as shown in the plan view. These little swellings, or burrs, straighten out or shear off it it is necessary to remove

the pin, but usually will score the surface of the pin.

It should be noted that cast iron does not stake readily as it


not flow.
Fig. 111.
A small cotter pin retains but does not prevent loosening of the taper pin.
Fig. 112.
With this design, the taper pin is pulled tight with the hex nut which bears against a flat on the
external member, although this flat is not necessary.
Some engineers prefer to use a lock washer under the nut, in
which case both the nut and the external member should not be Hardened. Thus the lock washer can get a grip.
is

brittle

and

will

P^lp^
y/////////////////A

Fig. 113.
Fig. 114.
Fig. 113.
In this design, the screw stud is expanded and locked by the use of a taper pin. The stud
as shown in the end view.
The taper pin rests in the bottom of the hole, and the stud is screwed in until

turned no farther.
Fig. 114.
This shows a twofold purpose.
the sUdable inner member.

The

Fig. 115.

sa wed-off taper pin acts as a holding device

Fig. 116.

Fig. 117.

is

slitted

it

can be

and as a key guide to

Fig. 118.

Here the pin flattened and used as a wedge. This method


accurate work, but,
the
hole
reamed too large or wears too much, the next larger taper pin maj' be used.
Figs. 116, 117, and
When a taper pin to be used a blind
one of the three methods shown here can
Fig. 115.

is

calls for

off

if

is

118.

is

in

hole,

be used. To facilitate loosening the pin, a square may be milled at the large end as in Fig. 116. It is well to cj'anide
this squared end.
Figure 117 shows a special form with a square head, the flat of which is equal to the large diameter.
This type should be hardened all over and ground on the body. In Fig. 118, the pin is threaded and jacked out by a
hex nut against a washer. The top end should be cyanided so it will not be pounded over during assembly. A fine
thread should be used so as not to weaken the pin by too small a root diameter. For appearances, the washer and
nut are left on, but this does not render it foolproof. This form is used as a dowel pin where the held member must
be located accurately.

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS

105

HINGES AND PIVOTS FOR COVERS AND FLEXIBLE JOINTS


"^^^
Fig.

119. Com-

Fig. 120. With


the end peened,
the pin can be

mon

cover hinge
with pin tiglit in
the cover and loose
in the hinge lugs.

made a

loose

fit

in

all lugs.

121. a
Fig.
plain pin with two

Fig.

double

122. a
tapered

cotters can be used


in
place
of
a

hole in cover lugs

peened

tightly

with

rivet.

pin
in

fiitting

outer

lugs.

123.
Sheet-metal cover
bent around the hinge pin.

Fig.

t;,

Fig.

A tapered pin makes


hinge adjustable.

124.

'

\\\

HI

''I

f1

Combination straight
and taper-pin hinge.

Fig. 125.

106

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS

Fig.

149.

Common

hinge applied to a
machine-tool cover.
steel

Fig.

Cover lugs cast


and pivot pins fas-

150.

integrally,

Fig. 151.
Wlien swinging member A is to be
removable, the bearing is
cut as in the left view.

tened in loose piece for greater


span.

Swinging rod reFig. 152.


Both
tained by pinned collar A.
lugs are integral with the casting.

10/

153.

Fig.

Pivot bearing as

gle or

used on an adjust-

Angle A should be
30 to 45 deg. to

Fig.

able vise .iaw.

154. Togpawl

retain the

joint.

member.

Fig. 155.
Radial and axial play are taken
up by the hardened and ground bushings

Fig. 156.
Needle-bearing pivot for either rotation or oscillation, with
three hardened and ground
washers for separating the

tapered to an included angle of 22^0 deg.,


sufficient to prevent sticking.

roUei-s.

Fig. 157.
Three liall joints used in a gear-shift
mechanism. Hole A is in shifting rod; B is the pivoting
center, which is retained by the inserted locating plug
at C.

158.
Socket joint
hemispherical
rod
ends held in place by screw
bushings.

Fig.

witli

Fig.
justing

159. Self-adsocket

joint.

The sheet -metal


spring cover is held
in place by two screws.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

108

160. Sheet-

Fig.

metal ball-socket

sphere

housing with cover


fastened by spot

stud.
Felt seals
retain the grease.

Fig.

is

161. The flattened


held by the center
are used to

Avelding.

Fig.

164,

Rocker-arm

as used

bearing

on an airplane.

Fig,

165.

Fig. 162.
pivot

Combina-

Fig.

and

joint,

end-thrust bearing, the


ball being retained by
the washer spun over
the fixed screw.

being

tion

Arm

joint

of

joint

pantograph machine, with center stud clamped without end


play, stud head and bushing
end forming the ball race.

snap

Fig. 166.

ring.

Arm

for accuracy.

163.
Universal
the smaller pin
retained by wire

joint designed

Upper

ball bear-

ing takes all thrust caused by


weight, and the spindle is pinned
to the stationary member.
The
bearing has a light press fit.

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS

109

CLAMPING SHOES AND PLUGS

Plug may mar the


Fig. 167.
shaft to the extent that disassembling might be impossible.
The smooth surfaces of the hole are
scored.

Fig. 168. The 60-deg. point


does not always line up with the
bottom of the thread.

Fig.

169. a

Fig. 170.

Fig. 171.

further im-

inside

diameter

of

the

A variation

of the preceding construc-

tion

is

obtained by

making the plug a

threaded hole.

fit

or milled

into the flat, and, once a ring is


made into the flat, it is hard to get
clear of it when the held member

must be moved

provement is a brass plug


making a loose fit with the

fiat filed

on the shaft is an improvement.


But the cup point of the screw bites

in the screw.

press

Here

to either side.

side in contact with the


shaft makes a full fit,
achieved by inserting a

Fig. 173.
This is simito the construction
shown in Fig. 172, a tap
being used instead of a

reamer into the hub bore

reamer.

Fig.

172.

the

lar

and

constantly feeding
the clamping screw while
the reamer is turning.

174.
When a
Fig.
longer clamping surface is
desired, a slot similar to a
key way is cut into .the
retaining member.

This construction facilitates


Fig. 175.
the removal of the plug but can be used
only when the diameter of the clamping
screw is large enough. Freedom of the
internal fillister head screw permits the
plug to assume its natural position against
the shaft.

Fig. 176.
This shows
another method of removing
a plug, by first removing the
clamping screw and then
inserting a small screw to fit
the tapped hole.

Fig. 179.
Fig. 178.
Fig. 177.
Figs. 177-179.
In these modifications of the clamping plug, the shoe is assembled after the clamping screw is
screwed through the hole. In Figs. 177 and 179, the shoe is retained by spinning or riveting, whereas in Fig. 178 a
In each case, the
pin through the hub of the shoe engages the circular half-round groove near the end of the screw.
shoe bears against the shoulder of the screw.

no

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS

111

LOCK BOLTS AND INDEXING MECHANISMS

,' Conica/ lock


l-op

bol-f

and boifom of

conical end m!l/ed off


I'o a//ow for wear

r:^':'~V\
:

^' Rofaiing

member
ZA ^Machined

hole

-keyed

lo prevenf rofafion

of bolf

Fig. 186.

Fig. 187.

Operaiing spring pushes ogoinsl pin


Screw- backed
brass shoe
j

clamps bolf

Sides ofsloh

ground, boflom
relieved^ open

end chamfered

ing

Brackel acts as
guide for cone-

(-4-

ended bolf and as


refainer for opera fing spring
Fig. 188.

Conical- ended
lock bolf,

Fig. 189.

-\'%rSlof

\j
/

Pin

^w
Pin keeps bolf oaf of

'Slol

engagemenf by dropping
info slof

when bolf is fumed

ES

Pivoi-'{

^^

Fig. 191.

Disengaging pin-.

siof

o f engagemenf

-Lock bolf

90deg.

Fig. 190.

Locking piece,

Bayonel

~M / keeps bolf oaf

^.

Lock boli

- - Flaf ground piece acfs as a


\ lock boll by engaging slof

Pivol

|:|ri1

/g

clearance allows spring


push bolf firmly inio

fo

lock- bolf plafe slof

Spring keeps bolf

engaged

Cam
Fig. 192.

acl'uafes
Fig. 193.

gear segmeni

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

112
/ Flo'f

reioining plaie

/!

^^^>

^'Lock boll wilh


rack machined

S^-.iT"
Recianqulor lock
boli milled ouf

cenlrally looccom-

modafe acluaflng
spring

In this design the rectangular lock bolt is


Fig. 194.
milled out centrally to accommodate actuating spring.
A pin is provided tor hand actuation when desired.

'Pinion manually

aclua led by
wrench or
handle
A rack is machined in the lock bolt.
Fig. 195.
Pinion meshing with rack is manxiaUy actuated with
wrench or handle.

Fig. 197.
More accurate form of
lock bolt, which is claimed by many
to be the correct method for this
type of design. The inclined surface gets the wear as it seats the
the bolt, whereas the straight or
radial side positions the bolt accuPositions A, B, C, and
rately.
correspond to those in Fig. 196, and
indicate that the corners
and Y

When indexing starts, the lock


Fig. 196.
bolt is released and rides on the periphery
At point A, it starts to sUde
of the plate.
down the inclined slot. At B is shown the
shearing or wearing action that takes place.
In case the plate has overrun or indexed past its
position as at C, the spring behind the lock bolt
is required to turn the plate, together with
the whole rotating mass attached to it, backward, resulting in wear on the side opposite

should be rounded. At
is shown
how the groove is ground. Other
notations are the same as given in

shown at B. At Z>, complete engagement is shown. Rounded corners as at X


and Y should be provided. There should be

to that

Fig. 196.

plenty of clearance as at E to allow for wear


is
because of the small angle of the slot. At
shown an improved form of gear. It assures
clearance and provides for grinding of the,
angular surfaces if necessary. If the lock-bolt
spring is not strong enough to seat the bolt by
rotating the plate, vibration will usually complete the seating, causing chatter at the cutting
tool or spindle and wear on the bolt and slot.
In this type of bolt, the angular sides are alike,
hence the direction may be opposite from that

Milled

Pin pre venis

ro la I ion

Fig. 198.

shown.

,-D^iJ.

'Tapered gibs perrnii accurole


in bolh side

n selfinq of boll

Fig. 199.

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS

113

Spn'nq-bocked bolf

A^
Hand-opera ied

.'

^^

^Locking ring

^^^^a<

Locking ring

(a)
(b)

^B

/ re/ease cam

Each locking ring


has series of five
projeciions or bolls

which engage one


anolher Each boll

and space machined accurately


lo occupy J6 deg.
of circle

^Engaging lug held


Y/xro'

'^y

V//V///,

in correal relation
^ cam by sehcrew
which engages keyway in boll
Fig. 201.

Fig. 200.

Taper pin

Side wa//s

of grooves LJ ~V/ Taper pin


hardened,

Section X~X

in lock- boll plales are

q- ^ Hardened

and

ground cylindrical lock boll

'Lever fhaf ocfuafes lock boll

Fig. 202.

Roller'^

Boll

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

114

Hand- operated
,

cam

/
/

Projecfion Jnfegral
niin cam engages ^

sloi- in

Boli

bolf

Bolf
disengaged

Bolt

engaged

Bolt
Bolt

engaged

disengaged

Tension spring
keeps bo/rin

^qo

Pivof center
locafion

engagement
Fig. 205.

Swinging

loci;

boll

j^e lease

Lug

Cam

"t^-" Lock boll

ZA^Handoperoled
lever

Xy- Lock-boll'

Cenlering lugs-'

plole

Plan

Fig. 207.
By using a lock-bolt plate larger than the work, the indexing error is diminished. The swinging lock
bolt is released automatically by the spring plunger, which has a predetermined movement, when the hand-operated
lever is moved to the left, as shown by the arrow marked Release, and the cam contacts the rounded top surface of the
lock bolt.
The ratchet is keyed with the lock-bolt plate to the spindle. As the lock bolt is released and the lever is
The lever is then pulled
rotated 30 deg. counterclockwise, the pawl engages the ne.xt tooth in the ratchet wheel at X.
in the direction of the arrow marked Index, the cam moving the lock bolt downward into the next opening in the
lock-bolt plate.
The plan view of the bolt shows the two centering lugs between which the lock bolt is additionally

supported.
L ock-

boll plale

keyed lo spindle
Spring-backed lock

,-- Groove J

boll,

---Xfe/K
'Indexing

handle
-Pin

Pin

-Prong
Locked
^

Plale

Third prong

Lock- boll plate

Prong

^Groove F

Lock-boll operaling plale freefo

'Lock boll

rolale

Fig. 208.

Fig. 209.
Fig. 208.
The handle is mounted on the plate and is independent of the lock-bolt plate. As the handle is pulled to
the left, the prong pushes against the pin driven into the spring-backed lock bolt, thereby disengaging the bolt.
At
the same time, the second prong contacts the plate at Z.
Both plates then move simultaneously, releasing the lock
bolt, which rides on the periphery of the lock-bolt plate, and the bolt falls into the next slot.
The handle is then pushed
back again, clockwise, contacting the plate at R, upon which a third prong pushes against the pin-seating lock bolt
in a locked position.
Fig. 209.
The plate is indexed through a half revolution in one direction and then back again in the opposite direc-

The lock-bolt plate is keyed to the spindle.

The lock-bolt operating plate is free to rotate on the spindle. When


the indexing handle is pushed counterclockwise, as shown at the right, groove F in the plate forces the lock bolt out of
engagement. The pin driven into the plate engages the slot in the plate, thereby lining up groove / with slot K. Upon
further movement in a counterclockwise direction, the roller on the bolt may slide into groove / and the bolt may enter
slot K.
The dashed line in both views show the positions when indexing in the opposite directions.
tion.

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS

115

MACHINE CLAMPS

Fig.

210.

Clamping with bolt


and bushing.

Fig. 214. Clamping a spindle with a


split bracket.

Fig.

211.

Clamping

by spring

Fig. 212.

Spindle clamping

bolt.

dovetail.

Fig. 213.
Clamping sliding table with plate and
bolt.

Fig.
split

215.

Sleeve

ends

at

for

Fig. 216.

Example
clamping,

of

wedge

Fig.

217.

with a

Clamping

split bracket.

clamping.

Fig. 218.

Clamping with an

eccentric.

Fig. 219.

Clamping a swiveling column.

'

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

116

DOOR AND COVER FASTENINGS

Finger grooves

Knob

com has o spiral


of abouf^in.jof file
circum ference of Ig in. oufsic/e diamefer of cam. Direction

"Casi-iron

Lever-type

lock.

When placed

rise

in vertical position, the weight


of lever fends fo lock bolt
more securely. Tapered

of spiral shouidiie such fhaf


wifh door hinged on left,
knob is fumed ro leff for opening door, anci when hinged
on fhe right knob is turned
right to open door

brocket furnishes
binding action

Suitable for heavy doors


such OS on motors, chain, or
belt

housings
Fig. 222.

Fig. 220.
,

Knurled

Tapered face ^

'Knob

xl;.jx

Alternate''
handle, a
steel castinq

Adjustable cam, with threaded hole,


the spiral being obtained by tapering
one face. Nut locks the cam in place

Fig. 223

Fig. 221.

Plain knob

Lugs hold 'spring i.


control

%^

Pressed steel flanged cap with


flat lea f spring fastener. A 90-de'i.
twist loosens cover Suitable for
closing inspection or adjustment

openings
Fig. 224.- -Snap-type fastener using a flat formed
spring.

Fig. 225.

Snap-type

fastener using

round wire spring.

Fig. 226.

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS


'

Cover

Aliernaie consfruc-tion requiring /<ey io

guide plunger

Fig. 227.

117

head or rivet or sere w/

Screv/ lype cover fasfening

Spring-backed

plunger type of
automatic door lock, for light duty.

To

"J

Openings larger ihon)

Fig.

228. Spring-backed

Fig. 229.

plunger engaging a cast lug


on case, suitable for light duty.

add wear resislonce,


and screw cyan-

lafch
ided

Cover located by^


'dowel pins

may be
lifted off

when latch
is opened

'A

two

coil spring

may be substituted
tor the shoulder
Fig. 231.

Fig. 230.

Simple cleaning-hole

cover.

Fig.

232.Shouldered stud
fastening.

'

'

Knob must be
unscrewed until

the corners

A-A clear
Stud bent 30deg., with knob for
locking

a chip cleaning hole cover


Fig. 233.

Fig.
Simple

234.

swing
bolt and openend slot.

Fig.

235. Tee-bolt type


fastening.

of

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

118

^^^^^
Finger

m.

liff

Weic/h-f ofex.-

Exfended finger grip

iending lug A
running full
wic/fh of cover
keeps if in place

Flush iop

^KlU

Fig. 236.

Stove-plate-type cover
held by gravity.

Fig. 237.
A simple cover
held by gravity and requiring
no machine work.

Fig.

38.Pivoted

oil-

hole cover.

[lis;

Weigh f of knob
keeps hook in place

Fig. 241.

Fig. 240.

Vertical cover
Fig. 239.
swung on a screw.

Bevel-

16

^8

0.005"
clearance

Co ver is slipped
over stud and
drops on body
of The sfuds,
being held by
gravify

Fig. 242.

Positive type

of gravity lock.

Plain gravity

latch.

LATCHES, LOCKS, AND FASTENINGS

119

BOLT DIAMETER, LOAD, AND STRESS U.S. STANDARD 60-DEG.V THREAD


-I

Tol^al

Tension Load on BoH"

in

Pounds

(L)

CHAPTER V

SPRINGS
Page

Page

Spring Wire Specifications

122

Table of Wire Gages and Diameters, with


Their Squares, Cubes, and Fourth Powers 138

Design Stresses

128

Design of Helical Springs

Torsional Moduli

Inspection and Testing of Springs

130

131

132

Formulas for Helical Springs

133

Form

for

Design Calculations

Standard Drawings for Springs

of

Helical

139

Spring
140

Helical Spring Charts for Specified Ratio

Natural Frequenc3r
Permissible Manufacturing Tolerances

Solution

Formulas

Allowable Stresses Based on Endurance


Limits

Graphical

134
136

137

121

of Loads and Lengths


141
Designs of Tension Spring Ends
144
Flat Cantilever Springs, Graphical Design
of
145
Semielliptic Laminated Springs, Graphical
Design of
148

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

122

Design of Helical Springs


Condensation of

Company

the

standard specifications and design procedure adopted by the Atlas Imperial Diesel Engine

as set forth by

W. M.

product engineer of that company, in

Griffith,

March and April 1937, Product

Engineering.

CLASSES OF SPRING SERVICE


Rapid, continuous deflection over a uniform stress range from zero to a
maximum or from an intermediate stress to maximum as in engine valve springs.

Class

I.

Class

II.

Rapid

may be from zero to


maximumbut with only

deflections over a variable stress range that

intermediate, intermediate to

maximum,

or zero to

as in springs for engine governors.

intermittent operation
Class III.

loaded at maximum stress or infrequent deflections with


from zero to intermediate, intermediate to maximum, or zero to
but with only infrequent operation as springs for relief valves.

Statically

stress range

maximum

PURCHASE SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPRING WIRE


The minimum

physical properties given in these specifications are 95 per cent of

the average values determined by tests. Thus the


specified are well within commercial limits.

minimmn

physical properties here

SWEDISH STEEL SPRING WIRE SPECIFICATIONS


Generally used for Class I extension or compression springs and Class II and
Class III extension springs, in wire diameters from 0.1055 in. up to 0.262 in. This
material can be used for springs of larger or smaller wire diameter, but generally

music wire

is

used for the smaUer wire diameters and carbon steel for the larger wires.
1.

Steel Manufacture

This steel is to be of Swedish manufacture according to approved practice by the


acid open-hearth or electric-furnace process.
2.

Chemical Composition
0.60-0.70
0.45-0.65
0.15-0.25

Carbon
Manganese
Silicon

3.

Physical Properties

Minimum
strength,

Range

0.025 max.
0.025 max.

Phosphorus
Sulphur

lb.

Alinimum

tensile

per sq.

in.

strength,

lb.

torsional

per sq.

in.

of wire diameter, in.

Ultimate

Elastic

Ultimate

limit

limit

0.1055 and under.


0.1205-0.1350...

0.1483-0.1920...
0.2070-0.2625...
0.2812-0.3437...
0.3625-0.4375...
0.4615-0.5625 ..
.

Reduction of area, 48 per cent minimum.

212,000
202,000
187,000
175,000
164,000
155,000
146,000
Elongation in 10

in.,

154,000
146,000
136,000
126,000
119,000
112,000
106,000
5 per cent

Elastic

184,000
175,000
163,000
151,000
142,000
135,000
127,000

minimum.

112,000
106,000
99,000
92,000
86,000
82,000
77,000

SPRINGS

123

Twist Test Samples taken from any part of the bundle of wire must withstand
twisting seven revolutions forward and seven reverse, at a twisting speed not to exceed
:

25 r.p.m., for the number of times as given in the following table, and the ultimate
break must be clean and square.

Length of wire between


Diameter

of wire, in

Minimum

0.1055

0.1205

0.1250

0.1350

0.1483

0.1563

0.1620

0.1770

23

20

20

18

17

16

15

14

twisting

cycles

Length
Diameter

of wire

of wire, in

Minimum

between
0.1875

0.1920

0.2070

0.2188

0.2253

0.2437

0.2500

0.2625

20

19

18

17

16

15

15

14

0.2813

0.2830

0.3065

0.3125

0.3310

0.3438

0.3625

18

17

16

16

15

14

14

Length of wire between

Minimum

of wire, in

Diarneter of wire,

in.

20

grips,

twisting cycles

Length of wire between

Minimum

grips, 15 in.

twisting

cycles

Diameter

grips, 10 in.

grips,

30

in.

in.

0.3750 0.3938 0.4063 0.4305 0.4375 0.4615 0.4688 0.4900 0.500 0.5313 0.5625

twisting

20

cycles

18

19

4.

17

17

16

16

15

15

14

13

Surface Conditions

Upon etching with a hot solution of hydrochloric acid sufficiently to disclose


surface defects, no hairline cracks, seams, pits, gouges, die marks, or other imperfections shall be revealed.
Decarburization must be held to a minimum.
5.

Limits of Variations in Diameter

Wire diameter 0.162 in. and less plus or minus 0.0015 in.
Wire diameter 0.1770 in. and over plus or minus 0.002 in.
6.

AU

Inspection, Rejections,

and Replacements

springs will be rigidly inspected at the plant as received.

If

more than a

on any one purchase order are made of steel that


to comply with the preceding specifications, or with the specifications on the

total of 10 per cent of the springs


fails

detail drawing, the entire lot will

be rejected. All springs rejected at the plant wHl


be held at the seller's risk for a reasonable length of time, subject to his instructions,
and shall be replaced by the seller without further cost to the purchaser.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

124

CARBON-STEEL SPRING WIRE SPECIFICATIONS


Generally used for springs of wire diameter greater than 0.262
square or rectangular wire ranging from M2 X }i2 in. up to
X

by M2

in.,

for sizes larger than

and

1.

This steel is to be
open-hearth process.

HX

/4 in.,

advancing by

practice

0.60-0.70
0.45-0.65
3.

0.025 max.
0.025 max.

Physical Properties

Minimum

tensile

torsional

strength, lb. per sq. in.

strength, lb. per sq. in.


of wire diameter, in.

0.1055 and under.


0.1205-0.1350....
0.1483-0.1920....
0.2070-0.2625..,.

0.2813-0.3438....
.

0.4615-0.5625....
Reduction

electric-furnace or

Sulphur
Phosphorus

Minimum

by the

Chemical Composition

Carbon
Manganese

0.3625-0.4375.

in.

Steel Manufacture

made according to approved

2.

Range

He

and also for


in., advancing

in.

of area

48 per cent minimum.


4.

Ultimate

Elastic limit

Ultimate

Elastic limit

202,000
191,000
178,000
165,000
156,000
147,000
139,000

132,000
125,000
117,000
108,000
102,000
97,000
91,000

165,000
157,000
145,000
136,000
127,000
121,000
114,000

108,000
103,000
95,000
89,000
84,000
79,000
74,000

Elongation in 10

in.,

5 per cent

minimum.

Surface Conditions

Upon

etching with a hot solution of hydrochloric acid sufficiently to disclose surface defects, no seams, hairline or otherwise, pits, gouges, die marks, or other imperDecarburization must be held to a minimum.
fections shall be revealed.
5.

Limits of Variation in Diameter

plus or minus 0.0015


plus or minus 0.002

Wire diameter 0.1762 in. and less


Wire diameter 0.177 in. and over
6.

in.

in.

Inspection, Rejections,

and Replacements

If more than a
All springs will be rigidly inspected at the plants as received.
total of 10 per cent of the springs on any one purchase order are made of steel that
fails to

comply with the above

with the specifications on the detail


All springs rejected at the plants wUl be held

specifications, or

drawing, the entire lot will be rejected.


at the seller's risk for a reasonable length of time, subject to his instructions, and shall
be replaced by the seller without further cost to the purchaser.

SPRINGS

CHROME-VANADIUM-STEEL SPRING WIRE,

125
S.A.E. 6150

SPECIFICATIONS

Generally used for same range of sizes of spring wire as covered by carbon-steel
spring wire, and where the higher physicals of the chrome-vanadium-steel wire make
its

use specially desirable or necessary.


1.

Steel Manufacture

This steel is to be made according to approved practice by the electric-furnace or


open-hearth process.

Chemical Composition

2.

0.45-0.55
0.50-0.90
0.80-1.10
0.15 min.

Carbon
Manganese

Chromium
Vanadium

3.

Range

of wire diameter, in.

Sulphur
Phosphorus
Sihcon

Physical Properties

0.5 max.
0.04 ma.\.
0.15-0.30

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

126

MUSIC -WIRE SPRING STEEL SPECIFICATIONS


Generally used for Class I compression springs in wire sizes up to and including
wire diameter. Springs made of this wire should not be finished.

0. 105 in.

1.

Steel Manufacture

This steel is to be of Swedish manufacture according to approved practice by


the acid open-hearth or electric-furnace process.
2.

Carbon
Manganese
Silicon

Chemical Composition
0.60-1.00
0.25-0.50
0. 10-0.20

3.

Range

of wire diameter, in.

Sulphur
Phosphorus

Physical Properties

0.25 max.
0.25 max.

SPRINGS

127

PHOSPHOR BRONZE SPRING WIRE S.A.E.


Used only

for small springs, especially

81

where resistance to moisture or other

Can be used in Class I, Class II, or Class III service. DiamSquare or rectangular mateeters are specified in Brown and Sharpe gage numbers.
rial may be used from a minimum size of M2 X M2 in. to a maximum of M X Yi in.,
advancing by M2 in.
corrosion

is essential.

Chemical Composition

1.

Tin
Phosphorus
Zinc,

..

4.00-6.00
0.03-0.40
20

..

max

2.

Iron,

Lead,

max
max

0.10
0. 10

Copper

remainder

Tensile Strength

Minimum

Range of Wire
Diameter,

Up

In.

to 0.0625

0.0625-0.1250
0.1250-0.2500
0.2500-0.3750
3.

Tensile Strength,
Lb. per Sq. In.
130,000
120,000
110,000
100,000

Bend Test

The wire should be capable


on

itself

of being bent through an angle of 180 deg.


without fracture on the outside of the bent portion.
4.

free

shall be uniform in quality and temper, cylindrical


from injurious defects.
5.

back

Appearance

The wire
and

flat

in shape,

and smooth

Dimensional Tolerances

The wire shaU not vary from the specified diameter by more than the
Sizes over 0.050 in., by plus or minus 1 per cent
Sizes 0.050 to 0.025 in., by plus or minus 0.0005 in.
Sizes under 0.025 in., by plus or minus 0.00025 in.

BRASS SPRING WIRE,

following:

S.A.E. 80

This material may be used for the same types and classes of springs for which
phosphor bronze is suitable. It is available in two grades, as given below, Grade A
for use where the requirements are especially severe and Grade B for use under
ordinary conditions. Grade B will be furnished unless otherwise specified.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

128

2.

Physical Properties

This wire shall have a tensile strength of at least 100,000 lb. per sq. in. but should
be capable of being bent through an angle of 180 deg. around a ware of the same
diameter without breaking.
3.

The wire
and

free

shall

Appearance

be uniform in quaUty and temper, cyhndrical in shape, and smooth

from injurious

defects.

4.

Dimensional Tolerances

not vary from the specified diameter by more than the following:
by plus or minus 1 per cent
Sizes 0.050 to 0.025 in., by plus or minus 0.0005 in.
Sizes under 0.025 in. by plus or minus 0.00025 in.

The wire

shall

Sizes over 0.050 in.,

DESIGN CALCULATIONS
Class I springs,

i.e.,

springs subjected to rapid continuous deflections over a uni-

from zero to maximum or from an intermediate stress to maximum,


as in engine valve springs, must be designed on the basis of the endurance hmit of
the material. Class II and Class III springs, respectively, springs that operate only
intermittently or springs that are statically loaded are designed on the basis of the
form

stress range

static strength of the material.

with decreased
wire diameter, as shown in Figs. 243 to 247, a larger permissible stress can be used for
the smaller wires. The following table gives the maximum permissible working

Because the

static strength of wire of a given material increases

stresses for springs for Class II

MAXIMUM

and Class

III service.

SPRINGS

250

129

Chemical analysis

Carbon
Manganese
Silicon

'^^

Phosphorous
Sulphur

O65-Q70
0.45-0,65
Q 15- 0.25

Q025max.'
Q025n-iax,

^//',

150

100

50

01

Fig.

243.

0.2

Swedish

03

Diam.of Wire

05

0.4
in Inches

Relation
steel wire.
diameter to physical properties.

02

03

niam. of Wire

of

03
02
Diam.of Wire

06

wire

Inches

Chrome-vanadium-steel wire, S.A.E. 6150.


Fig. 245.
Relation of wire diameter to physical properties.

Inches

Relation
Carbon-steel wire, S.A.E. 1065.
of wire diameter to physical properties.

Fig. 244.

0.4
in

04
in

0.1

0.3

0.2

Diom. of Wire

in

Inches

Fig. 246. Music wire, S.A.E.


Relation of wire diameter
1095.
to physical properties.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

130

0.2

Fig. 247.

Phosphor bronze

wire, S.A.E. 81.

0.4

0.3

Diam. of Wire

in

Inches

Relation of wire diameter to physical properties.

WAHL CORRECTION FACTOR


As the spring

maximum

index,

i.e.,

the ratio of coU diameter to wire diameter, decreases,

developed becomes increasingly greater than that as calculated


by the conventional formulas. To compensate for this in the design calculations,
the Wahl correction factor must be applied. The accompanying chart (Fig. 248)
the

stress

2.0

1.9

>-

1.8

fel.7
-*-

i 16

IO

1.5

-13

iL2
II

1.0

SPRINGS

10

20

30

40

Lower S/ress

249.

Fig.

Allowable

in

torsional stress
steel wire.

Swedish
no
100

50

t
i 60

50

40

55 30

E
E

.20

"5

10

Fig.

80
90
50
60
70
Thousands of Lb.perSq.ln.

range

for

131

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

132

In calculating Class I springs, the procedure is similar except that the permissible
working stress must be based on the endurance value of the material. A tentative
allowable stress is assumed, and the wire diameter is calculated by following the same
procedure as outlined above for Class I and Class II springs. The calculated wire
diameter is then checked against the endurance charts as given in Figs. 249 to 253 for
the various materials.

As an example
calculated to be

of the use of the

made

endurance charts, assume a valve spring had been

and the wire calculated


closed and 81,000 lb. per sq. in.

of Swedish steel wire 0.177 in. diameter

to be stressed to 62,000 lb. per sq.

in.

when the valve is

SPRINGS

133

TABLES FOR CALCULATING HELICAL SPRINGS


COMPRESSION SPRING FORMULAS
=

Spring index

Round

-K

AUd
=

- d)Y

MWL

"^

(2.25d)

MWL

^k
Sbt

Fa = FN
FL =Fn +

Pitch

= P/Fn Load

11.16P(D

Fh =

MWL

Fi.

--[<i^+0]

Pitch

SoUd length = ro.48d (

(l.lOdiV)

(2.25d)

^TFL

=F X N

=[ 0.53d

= P/Fn

^^ ^ +

N=

(maximum)
r
a

Gd^

Solid length

MWL

of deflection

ro.48f

= P/Fn

(g-^-g

= [o.sat^ ^^

'^1

l) N~\

Rectangular
-|FL[-

-r-TnJ:
^Wd~^

W=
N

d)Y

FL

F =

AWt

0.4445^3

(D

0A8d

8P{D - dy
F =

l) '^l

Square

AUd

- d)Y

.--['(i^+O]

EXTENSION SPRING FORMULAS


Pitch = EL/N
Load per inch deflection = P/Fn

r-l;'^^

(D

MWL

Load per inch

(^+l)^]

Round

0.3927Sd^

6)2

iV

per inch of deflection

2.25)d

FN

= Fn +

+m

Gbt(b'

w=

6)y

(maximum)

d)'

(iV

Fn

(o^d +

iV

of deflection

VbV

3.185(1)

Gd'

{2.25d)

5.58P(0

Solid length

_t

(maximum)

SP(D
d)3
F =
Gd'
Fv = FN
FL =Fn + MWL

Load per inch

_h-FL-^

-i

_ 0A44Sd'
~ (.D - d)Y

-'^^-

FL -

(minimum)
Rectangular

(maximum)

l.lOd

Pitch

^kd

0.3927Sd'

(D

-r-

Square

-FL-^

-r or

5.58P{D
Gd'

Sbt Vb'-

dy

S.185Y(D

r-

b)

FL

N=

D
-

{^
U.16P{D -

OASt

F =

GbtiV-

by

f)

134

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


TABLES FOR CALCULATING HELICAL SPRINGS
TORSION SPRING FORMULAS
Pitch = FLIN

Hound

SPRINGS
proportional to the

number

135

In a compression spring, the number of


number of turns less 2K turns, assuming IM dead turns

of active turns.

active turns mil be the total


at each end of the spring.

DEFLECTION
Calculate the deflection per turn and total deflection

by the formulas given

in

on pages 133 and 134. For compression springs, the number of active or
turns
will be the total number of turns less 2M turns.

the tables
effective

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Compression Springs. Ends must be ground square. Minimum and maximum


inside and outside diameters will be determined by the space restrictions imposed by
the application. Both ends of the compression spring should be guided on either the
outside or inside or both.
All compression springs should be wound right hand
except where they operate inside one another, in which case they should be wound
oppositely.
Minimum working length of the spring under compression should allow a
minimum clearance between effective turns equal to 10 per cent of the wire diameter.
Additional compression beyond this minimum working should not be permitted.
Extension Springs. They may be close wound with or without initial tension,
or they may ]5e open wound.
They should always be wound without initial tension
when load capacity is an important factor. All extension springs should be wound
right hand unless required otherwise.
Maximum working length determines the
position of the spring beyond which additional extension should not be permitted.

FINISHES
Steel springs to resist moisture or atmospheric corrosion should be

For appearance, they

may

be enameled, lacquered, or japanned.


made of nonferrous metals are usually not finished in any manner.
plated.

cadmium
Springs

STANDARD DESIGN PROCEDURE


By

using a form such as given on page 136, the procedure in designing springs
can be standardized. The data relating to the actual dimensions and characteristics
of the spring are obtained from the inspection or test department.

Examples

of

STANDARD DRAWINGS
standard drawings on sheets 83-2 X 11 in. for the three types of heh-

cal springs, compression, tension,

and

torsion, are

shown on page

137.

Drawing need

not be to scale. Wire sizes should be specified in inches, not gage numbers. Use
decimals for specifying wire diameters and fractions of inches for rectangular materials.
Also dimension the thickness of rectangular wire so as to indicate how the wire is to be
wound. Indicate finish, if any. In dimensioning the drawing, indicate the permissible manufacturing tolerances as given in table above, but tolerances as large as per-

missible should always be specified.

minus, the

The
given.

mean

Load tolerances should be indicated as plus

or

value to correspond with the specific rate.

notations and dimensions as given in the drawings show^n here should be

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

136

FORM FOR SPRING DESIGN CALCULATIONS


SPRING DESIGN
S-2494

Drg.No.

0-550

Pitch

Length of

F.L.

class

_Z_

Rate

^4

mwi

3.325

arm

^0

Max.O.D.

.Am.
MS-/2

Material

//

Min.I.D.

0.24-3 7 d/am.

Size

Max.def.

Length of rod

CALCULATIONS
3.32 S- OSS'

^,
^-

FL-MWL

Max.O.D.+ Mfn.I.D

,^
^"^-^^
,^

q56s

(D-d)

2.925

P=

G X d X Fn

~/1 500,000 x.0. 00352 7x

Pitch =

60

S =

6.25-0.55 -=
0.550

2.

925

= /Tg

8x8.2x/0.35

8x(D-d)^xN

_P__ 175
Ra+e= Fn
2.925

=2.015

2.015x175
0.3927x0.01447

1.18

>.

=73.200

SoUd length = (10.35 '^ 2.25) %.0.2437 = 3.07

W.35

ACTUAL VALUES
F.L.

^32

Set

6#

Average of

/QS"

Load

5(g

10

Def.

_ll

Total turn

Springs

O.D

Solid length

I3_

^3Z

Manufactured by

D.

0.2^

GIBSON

200

3.32

Lengthy Inches
Original by

6RE.

APPROVED BY

Checked by

Date
2-9'3&

AND.

DATE ISSUED
April

17,

1936

Date
2-25-36

SUPERSEDING

Tested by
GAV7.

SUPERSEDED BY

Date
3-25-36
REVISION DATES

SPRINGS

137

STANDARD DRAWINGS FOR SPRINGS

dead coils at
each end.
Grind ends square
I4

wifii

C.L.

Minimum wor Idng iengih


Jj2 max. JJ2 minr"
Rote -390

lb.

Free iengfii

per inch

Toleronce

-5 7o

Materiol

MS-IZ

musf be sfraigiif and compressible


minimum working length without coils
touching or taking a permanent set
Springs

fo

Size -0.250 diom.

Hand -Right
Finish

-Block Japon

ono^

wound withinitial tension

Close

out

Free iength

Maximum working length


-4i
Rate- 1601b per inch
Tolerance -t 57o

Material- MS-13
Size- 0.135 diom.

Hond- Right
Finish- Block

*l

length between ends


Springs must be straight and capable of extension
maximum working length without taking a
permanent set Ends must be neatly made and
without mutilation of wire
to

Japon

{'Maximum deflection 180 degrees

--22 Free length

Rote
Toleronce
Materiol-S.A.E.81
Size- 0.125 diom.

Hand
I

Sp^'hgs musf be straight and capable of


withstanding maximum deflection without
taking a permanen t set Ends must be
neatly made and without mutilation of wire

-Right

Finish-None

Examples of standard spring drawings. At the top is a compression spring; in


is shown an extension spring; at the bottom is a torsion spring.

the middle

138

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


Wire Gages, Diameters, and Their Squares, Cubes, and Fourth Powers
MONEL, BRONZE, AND BRASS WIRE
STEEL WIRE SIZES
(Washburn

No.

& Moen

gage)

(Brown

&

Sharpe gage)

SPRINGS

139

The spring end construction of tension and torsion springs should be given
by showing all necessary views. See page 144 for typical spring ends.

in

detail

INSPECTION
All springs received shall be carefully inspected, tested,

and marked, where

required, for identification.

Inspection shall cover

and on the material

all

specification requirements noted

specification sheets.

on the spring drawings

Particular care should be exercised in

make certain all defects noted on the material specification


In case of doubt, one or two springs from the shipment in question
should be etched in a 30 per cent solution of boUing hydrochloric acid for a sufficient
length of time to reduce the diameter 0.002 to 0.003 in. After etching, aU material
or manufacturing defects are readily discernible.
inspecting the material to
sheets are absent.

A sufficient number of springs from each shipment


the spring rate
any,

is

be tested to determine

within the limits specified on the drawing.

when compressed

to the

All springs failing to

more than 10 per cent


ment shall be rejected.
If

shall

minimum working

The amount

of set,

if
if

length must also be determined.

meet the requirements referred to above shall be rejected.


on any one order are rejected, the entire ship-

of the springs

Springs constructed of music wire,

Monel metal, phosphor bronze,

or brass shall

not be marked in any way for identification. Springs made of steel shaU have one or
two coUs at one end painted a color corresponding to that indicated as follows Swedish steel, blue; carbon steel, orange; chrome vanadium steel, red.
The paint used
shall be quick-drying, oilproof, heat-resisting lacquer.
:

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

140

GRAPHICAL SOLUTION OF HELICAL SPRING FORMULAS


F= Inches Deflection per Turn at Stress Indicated
0,21

0.18
I

i__l

0.12

0,15
.

0,06

0.10 0,09

^-^'f

90,000^

75,000

6Q000

60,000

75,000
100

110

120125
'

90' 100
-125,000 '^

110

120

9Q000

130 140 150

Pounds Tension or Compression Load on the Spring at Maximum Unit Stresses Indicated

This chart, developed by Carl P. Nachod, of Nachod & United States Signal Co.,
can be used for the solution of the formulas for round-wire hehcal springs given on the
preceding pages. The chart is based on G being 11,500,000. The Wahl factor is
incorporated in the equation on which this chart is based.
To use the chart: Given a load P of 20.1 lb. and an allowable stress of 60,000 lb.
per sq. in.; go vertically upward from the point representing 20.1 lb. on the lower
60,000 scale to the intersection Avith the load ray, extending upward to the right, corresponding to the spring index (D/d) selected, in this example r = 8. A horizontal line
through the intersection point to the scale for wire diameters gives d = 0.09 in.
Extend this horizontal line to the- right to the "deflection" ray r = 8 of the group of
rays extending upward to the left. From this point, trace vertically upward to the

scale corresponding to the value of

0.079

in.

per turn at 60,000

lb.

per sq.

selected,

in. stress.

and

this gives the deflection

as

SPRINGS

141

HELICAL SPRINGS OF GIVEN LOAD RATIO AND LENGTH RATIO


Graphical computation charts, developed by Frederick Franz, for springs for
specified maximum load and length and specified minimum load and length based on

G =
Step

1.

To determine

Compression Springs.
load
of

Pmax.,

Divide specified

L,in.

line representing load ratio

50,000

spring index.

when compressed,

compressed length

S =

11,500,000

initial

to obtain load ratio.

to initial length Lma^.-

and the horizontal

load Pmm. on spring

by maximum

Similarly, calculate length ratio

The

intersection of the vertical

line representing length ratio gives

value of D/d, the ratio of outside diameter of coil to the diameter of the wire.
Tension Springs. Divide initial tension on spring by final tension, to obtain

load ratio.

The

Divide

initial

length of spring

by maximum

length, to obtain length ratio.

intersection of the vertical line representing load ratio -with the horizontal line

representing length ratio gives D/d, the ratio of outside diameter of coil to the diameter
of the wire.

-S-0,8

0,7

0.6

05
0.4-

0.3

0,2

0.1

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

142

When

the value of D/d, ratio of outside diameter of spring to diameter of wire,


has been determined, the chart below gives the maximum safe load, wire diameter,

and mean

coil

diameter for values of D/d, the spring index.

MAXIMUM

1.00

0.2

LOAD, WIRE DIAMETER,

MEAN

COIL DIAMETER,

AND SPRING INDEX

SPRINGS

143

For any other fiber stress, divide the selected fiber stress by 50,000, take the
root
of this ratio, and divide the diameter d obtained from the chart by this
square
stress.

factor.

Step

The
modulus

3.

To determine

chart

is

deflection per coil or per turn.

based on 50,000

of elasticity in shear.

lb.

per sq.

in. fiber stress

For other values

of

and 11,500,000 for G, the


stress and modulus of

maximum

CHART TO DETERMINE DEFLECTION PER COIL

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

144

Dimensions

and

DESIGNS OF TENSION SPRING ENDS


Y should always be specified and are in the

proportions shown.

See page 137 for standard spring drawings.

^iiiiir
'rrAVx

X-,

Y
-1

X^

,.Jli

>=p-

X.

^
^=
^p A ^
^='

SPRINGS
CANTILEVER SPRINGS
Maximum

Fiber Stress, Length, Deflection, and Thickness

145

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

146

CANTILEVER SPRINGS II
Maximum Fiber Stress for Given Loads
36

o o
o OOo in
^
CiciC' O' CJ

d odd d d
''''

lihlilihl

lllllllll

liiiiliiiili

Iniihi

-0.10

Spring Wicl+h(w)in Inches

^0.20

^030
j-0.40

o bo.50
-0.60

-OVO
-0.80

^
C3>

1.0

2.0

E-3.0

h^.O
SO

6.0
7.0
ao
1

mi

iii

[||mm

iii

1
1
|

M|

'

||

ii|iiii|

'

iii |ini|

iiii|
|

SPRINGS

147

CANTILEVER SPRINGS~ni
Load-deflection Ratio for Given Spring Dimensions

(Required thickness for given maximum deflection and fiber stress can be determined
by use of Charts I and II, pages 145 and 146)
0.5
lo

0.6

-5 08
-r

w
2.0

3.0

^i

06

^ E; 08
^^
1.0

-z f

2,0

'S'

148

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


SEMIELLIPTIC LAMINATED SPRINGS
Leaf Thickness
0.50

800

0.45

0.40

1,200

Rate-Lb. Load per

0.35

0.30

1,600
In.

Deflection

025

2,000

Q20

015

2,400

OIO

005

2,800

SPRINGS

149

SEMIELLIPTIC LAMINATED SPRINGS


The chart on the facing page will facilitate the design of a semielliptic spring having
graduated leaves of rectangular cross section. The chart is a graphical solution of
the following formulas

_ 2/ X d2E

KXU

^ -

^^^^

(31)

12
where

R =

rate of deflection, in

E =

modulus

load per

in.

of elasticity, 28,000,000

llr.

lb.

L = full length of spring, in in.


W = width of leaves, in in.
T = thickness of leaves, in in.
I = moment of inertia

deflection

per sq.

in.

constant for semielliptic springs


0.9

The accompanying example shows how

R =

By

to use the chart.

starting with the

up to the
length of spring, L = 55 in. Cross horizontally to the hne representing the number of
leaves, 6 leaves, then vertically to the hne in the upper section of the chart corresponddesired rate of deflection,

ing to the width of the spring,

The

parabohc curve.

1,200

"PF

0.4375

figure,

per

lb.

From

in.

in.,

from eye to eye, has

read straight

this point, trace horizontally to the

directly

nates the thickness of each leaf in the spring.


deflection, is 55 in.

in. deflection,

above

The

this last intersection, desig-

spring has 1,200

six leaves 5 in. wide,

lb.

and each

per

in. rate of

leaf is 0.4375 in.

thick.

To

find the safe load

from the

on the spring

S =

D =
E =
The

total

amount

modulus

i^

1^

in.

T =

thickness of leaves, in

L =

full

lb.

per sq.

in.

length of spring, in

in.

allowable working fiber stress will vary with the material used.
is

180,000

may
lb.

be considered a safe working

per sq.

in.,

can then be solved.

D multiplied by R

two-thirds of the elastic limit,

stress.

Usually

For example,

the safe unit stress will be 60,000

By substituting this latter value for S in the formula,

the

(rate of deflection in

amount

lb.

per

of deflection

pounds per inch)

wifl

In practice, the spring may be stressed to


but only under an occasional emergency load on the

give the fuU load capacity of the spring.


spring.

^ - SL'

or

-Jj-

of elasticity

the elastic hmit

sq. in.

4.DET

of deflection, in in.

unit fiber stress, in

one-third of the elastic Umit


if

have been estabhshed

chart,

^ where

after the other values

CHAPTER

VI

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS


AND MECHANISMS
Charts and nomograms for determining shaft and bearing sizes, horsepower
flat and V-belts, and tyJDical examples of safety gear design, gear
shifting mechanisms, bearing seals, gibs and guides, and cams.
The final pages
cover typical constructions of mechanical linkages.

transmitted by

P.\GE

Flexible Couplings

Shaft Diameters for Torsion and Bending.


Shaft Diameters for Torsional Deflection.

Shaft Diameters for Lateral Deflection

Shaft Diameters A.S.M.E. code

Two-bearing Shafts of Uniform Strength


Stress in Rotating Disk
Velocity Chart for Gears and Pullej^s
Flat-belt Length and Pulley Diameter
Flat-belt Speed-horsepower Charts
Belt Horsepower Charts
Flat-belt Horsepower Charts
Flat and V-belt Horsepower Charts
V-belt Lengths
Short-center Belt Drives

178

162

Chart for Calculating Needle Bearings


Thrust Bearing Friction Moments
Bronze Bearing Alloys

163

Shaft Seals

182

184

152

161

179

180

164

Roller-bearing Seals

166

Sleeve-bearing Seals

186

167

Safety Gears

188

168

Shifting

169

Gibs and Guides


Cam Designs
Variable-speed Devices
Transport Mechanisms
Automatic Feed Hoppers
Glue-applying Mechanisms

171

172
173
174
175
176

151

Mechanisms

190
195
198

199

201
203
205

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

152

FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
,

Shaft

'

Hose clamps

'Rubber hose

Coiled spring

^1* ' Shaft'

-n

Hole

Shaft-

'Shaft

This

Rubber hose
^Washer

Fig. 256.
Positive drive is assured by
bolting hose to shafts. This has the same
advantages as the type in Fig. 255, except
there is no ova load protection other than
the rupture of the hose.

For applications where torque is low and slipFig. 255.


page unimportant. It is easily assembled and disconnected
without disturbing either machine element. It is adaptable to
changes in longitudinal distance between machines. This
coupling absorbs shocks, is not damaged by overloads, does not
set up end thrusts, requires no lubrication, and compensates for
both angular and offset misalignment.

<//o/e

Shaft

excellent shock-absorbing
It will allow
qualities, but torsional vibrations are possible.
end play in shafts, but sets up end thrust in so doing. Other
advantages are the same as for the types shown in Figs. 255 and
256.
This type compensates for misalignment in any direction.

Fig.

257.

has

type

Sefscrews.

She

Coupling

Couplinq

Shaff-

Fig. 258.
Coupling for low torques and unidirectional
This type is easUy
rotation.
Inertia of rotating parts is low.
assembled and disconnected without disturbing either shaft.
The cable can be encased and the length extended to allow for
right-angle bends such as are used on dental drills and speedometer drives.
The ends of the cable are soldered or bound with
wire to prevent unraveling.

Hubs

>

Cover'

Fig. 259.
A type of Falk coupling that operates on the same principle as design shown in Fig. 260, but has a
single fiat spring in place of a series of coiled springs.
A high degree of flexibility is obtained by use of tapered slots in
hubs.
Smooth operation is maintained by enclosing the working parts and packing with grease.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS


Coiled^

153

Rubber bushings

springs

Shafi

FiG. 260.
Fig. 261.
Fig. 262.
Fig. 260.
Two flanges and a series of coiled springs give a high degree of flexibility. This type is used only
where the shafts have no free end play. It needs no lubrication, absorbs shocks, and provides protection against
overloads, but will set up torsional vibrations.
Springs can be of round or square wire with varying sizes and pitches
to allow for anj' degree of flexibility.
Fig. 261.
Similar to Fig. 260, except that rubber tubing, reinforced by bolts, is used instead of coiled springs.
Construction is sturdier but more hmited in flexibility. This type has no overload protection other than shearing
of the bolts.
It has good antivibration properties if thick rubber tubing is used.
It can absorb minor shocks.
The
connection can be quickly disassembled.
Fig. 262.
A series of pins engage rubber bushings cemented into flange. This type will allow minor end play
in shafts and provides a positive drive with good flexibility in all directions.

Fig. 263.
A Foote Gear Works flexible coupling which
has shear pins in a separate set of bushings to provide overload
protection.
The principle is similar to that shown in Fig. 264.
Replaceable shear pins are made of softer material than the

shear-pin bushings.

Fig. 264.
A design made by the Ajax Flexible
Coupling Company. Studs are firmly anchored
with nuts and lock washers and bear in selflubricating bronze bushings spaced alternately in
both flanges. Thick rubber bushings cemented in
flanges are forced over bronze bushings.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

154

F/ang^

^Shatt

'Spring
refaining

ring

Shafi-'

Flange

^F/ange

Keeper pin

Section Through

'

Cen+er

Fig. 265.
Another Foote Gear Works
coupling.
Flexibility is obtained bysolid conically shaped pins of metal or
fiber.
This coupling provides positive
drive of sturdy construction vfith flexi-

bility in all directions.

Fig. 266.
In this Smith & Serrell coupling, flexibility is
obtained by laminated pins built up of tempered spring steel
leaves.
Spring leaves secured to holder by keeper pin.
Phosphor bronze bearing strips are welded to outer spring
leaves and bear in rectangular holes of hardened-steel bushings fastened in flange.
Pins are free to slide endwise in one
flange but are locked in the other flange by a spring retaining
ring.

Rubber^ leather or fil:ierdisk

Buffer-

slot

Fig. 267.
In this Brown Engineering Companj'
coupling, flexibility is increased by addition of buffer
slots in the laminated leather.
These slots also aid
in the absorption of shock loads and torsional vibra-

Under parallel misalignment or shock loads,


buffer slots will close over their entire width, but under
angular misalignment, buffer slots will close only on
tion.

one

side.

Fig. 268.
Flexibility is provided by resilience of a
rubber, leather, or fiber disk in the W. A. Jones
Foundry & Machine Company coupling. Degree of
flexibility is limited to clearance between pins and
holes in the disk plus the resilience of the disk.
This
type has good shock-absorbing properties, allows for
end play, and needs no lubrication.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS


\

Flexible disks ^

155

Laminafed mefal disks^

Cenlerdisk-'''

made by

coupling

Aldricb
Pump Company, similar to Fig. 268, except
that bolts are used instead of pins. This
coupling permits only slight endwise movement
of the shaft and allows machines to be temporarily disconnected without disturbing the
Driving and driven members are
flanges.
flanged for protection against projecting bolts.
Fig.

269.

Fig. 270.

^Laminated metal disks are used in

The disks are


Flexible Coupling Company.
bolted to each flange and connected to each other by means of
pins supported by a steel center disk.
The spring action of the
center ring allows torsional flexibility, and the two side rings
compensate for angular and offset misalignment. This type
of coupling provides a positive drive in either direction without
setting up backlash.
No lubrication is required.
r^f^

^' Lea Iher

Secfion A-A

i-;\

design

made by Palmer-Bee Company

for

flange carries two studs, upon which are


mounted square metal blocks. The blocks slide in the slots
of the center metal disk.

Each

,/

Rivet

disk

Section

A-A

principle of the T. B. Wood k


Sons Company coupling is the same as Fig. 272.
but the driving lugs are cast integrally with the
metal flanges. The laminated leather disk is

Fig.

Fig. 271.
heavy torques.

this coupling

made hy Thomas

273.The

to accommodate the metal driving


This coupling has flexilugs of each flange.
bility in all directions and does not require
lubrication.

punched out

members

Cast- iron
~hiub

Leaf her

Leaiher -'
disk

Fig. 272.
In this Charles Bond Company coupling, a
leather disk floats between two identical flanges.
Drive
is through four laminated leather lugs cemented and
riveted to the leather disk.
This type compensates for
all directions, and sets up no end
Driving
flanges are made of cast iron.
lug slots are cored.

misalignment in

thrusts.

The

Fig. 274.

Another design made by Charles Bond

The flanges have square recesses into


which a built-up leather cube fits. Endwise movement is prevented by through bolts used where low
torque loads are to be transmitted.
Company.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

156

Flange ^^ A
Leai-her
'cross ^

Band

"

A-A

Section

--|

^3^

Fig. 275.
Similar to Fig. 274, being quiet in
operation and used for low torques. Tliis is also
a design of Charles Bond Company. The floating
member is made of laminated leather and is shaped
like a cross.
The ends of the intermediate member
engage the two cored slots of each flange. The
coupling will withstand a limited amount of end
play.

Fig. 276.
Pins mounted in flanges are connected by
Coupling is used for
canvas, or rubber bands.
temporary connections where large torques are transmitted,
such as the driving of dynamometers by test engines. This
type allows for a large amount of flexibility in all directions,
Machines
absorbs shocks, but requires frequent inspection.
can be quickly disconnected, especially when belt fasteners
The driven member lags behind the
are used on the bands.
driver v/hen under load.

leather,

iLeaiher belf

Cable

Ir'nks

This Bruce-Macbeth Engine Company coupling


Fig. 277.
is similar to that of Fig. 276, except that sL\ endless wire cable
The links engage
links are used, made of plow-steel wire rope.
small metal spools mounted on eccentric bushings. By turning
these bushings, the links are adjusted to the proper tension.
The load is transmitted from one flange to the other by direct
pull on the cable links.

This Webster Manufacturing


coupling uses a single* endless leather
belt instead of a series of bands, as in Fig. 276.
The belt is looped over alternate pins in both
This type has good shock-resisting
flanges.
properties because of belt stretch and the
tendency of the pins to settle back iuto the loops
Fig.

278.

Company

of the belt.

'Endless ropes -

279.

This

-_

made by

''"^

the Weller
Manufacturing Company is similar to the design in
Fig. 278, but instead of a leather belt uses hemp rope,
made endless by splicing. The action under load
is the same as in the endless-belt type.
Fig.

coupling

Leather

link

Fig. 280.
This Bruce- Macbeth design uses leather
links instead of endless wire cables, as shown in Fig. 277.
The load is transmitted from one flange to the other by
direct pull of the links, which at the same time allows for
the proper flexibility.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

Floaiing
disk

157

Leafher
sfar

Sec+ion X-X
Fig. 281.
Fig. 282.
Fig. 281.
The Oldham form of couphng made by
W. A. Jones Foundry and Machine Company is of the
two-jaw type with a metal disk. Is used for transmitting heavy loads at low speed.
Fig. 282.
The Charles Bond Company star
coupling is similar to the cross type shown in Fig. 275.
The star-shaped floating member is made of laminated
leather.
It has three jaws in each flange.
Torque
capacity is thus increased over the two-jaw or cross
type. The couphng takes limited end play.

Fig. 284.
Fig. 285.
Fig. 284.
A metal block as a floating center is used in
this American Flexible Coupling Company design.
Quiet operation is secured by facing the block with

removable

fiber

and packing the center with

strips

The coupling sets up no end thrusts, is easy to


assemble, and does not depend on flexible material for the
driving action.
It can be built in small sizes by using
grease.

hardwood block without facings

This

285.

high torques in
needed.

either

'"

member.

direction.

No

lubrication

is

Rubberized
fabric disks'

Flexible disk

Fig. 283.
A combination rubber and canvas disk
bolted to two metal spiders.
Extensively used for
low torques where compensation for only slight
angular misalignment is required. It is quiet in
operation and needs no lubrication or other attention.
Offset misalignment shortens disk life.
is

for the floating

Westinghouse Nuttall Company


coupling is an all-metal type having excellent torsional
flexibility.
The eight compression springs compensate
for angular and offset misalignment.
This type allows
for some free endwise float of the shafts.
It will transmit
Fig.

Fig. 286. Similar to Fig. 283, but wOl withstand offset


misahgnment by addition of the extra disks. The center
spider is free to float.
By use of two rubber-canvas
disks, as shown, the coupling wiU withstand a consider-

able angular misalignment.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

158

Siee/ sfr/ps -

Spiders

,-

3-piece sleeve

- -;

Compression sleeve

'-^A
287.

Section k'k

In

Smith

&

coupling, a
cross made of laminated-steel strips floats
between two spiders. The laminated spokes, retained
by four segmental shoes, engage lugs integral with the
This coupling is intended for light loads
flanges.

Fig.

this

Serrell

flexible

only.

^Spring regaining pin

Fig.

Fig. 290.
290.
In this

Fig. 291.

coupling of Falls Clutch &


two hubs with triangular heads

Machinery Company,
and a three-piece sleeve are used.

The

sleeve

is

assembling. Three pieces of


compression lining provide the necessary flexibility.

bolted together

when

Misalignment is compensated for in all directions by


compression of the linings..
Fig. 291.
This Medart Company flexible coupling
uses square keys or pins of fiber, Textolite, or other
Clearance is
flexible material which engage V slots.
provided in the V slots for flexibility. The pins are
Coupling can
held in place by a retaining collar.
float endwise.

Fig. 288.

This coupling, made by Brown Engineering

useful for improvising connections between


apparatus in laboratories and similar temporary installations.
It compensates for misalignment in all directions.
It will absorb varying degrees of torsional shocks by
changing the size of the springs. Springs are retained
by threaded pins engaging the coils. Overload protection is possible by the slippage or breakage of replaceable

Company,

is

springs.

Mm

^s

m
Oil /eveI when^
nol in molion

Laminafed'
1

Fig. 289.

..

^Oil reservoir

spoices

In another design by Brown Engineering

Company, a.series of laminated spokes transmit power


between the two flanges without setting up end
This type allows free end play. Other
thrusts.
advantages are the absorption of torsional shocks, no
exposed moving parts, and good balance at all speeds.
Wearing parts are replaceable and working parts are
protected from dust.

In

holes

the design of the W. H. Nicholson &


Company flexible coupling, a series of floating steel keys
shde in dovetail slots cut into each flange. The degree of
misalignment compensated for depends on the clearance
between the keys and slots. Wear is reduced, and
cushioning is provided by operating keys in oil bath.
Keys act noiselessly, centrifugal force keeping them
Fig. 292.

against the slot surfaces.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

159

Hub,

Packing ^

Spring
reiaining

- Projecting
'

iooihon

hub
'Projeciing
ioo+ti in

Keeper
ring

sleeve

Fig. 293.
Fig. 294.
Fig. 293.
In another design made by Falls Clutch &
Machinery Company, a triangular center floating member made of steel is placed inside two flanges. As in
Fig. 290, three pieces of compression lining are used.
Coupling flanges are triangularly recessed.
Fig. 294.
In this Clark Controller Company design, a
splined hub mounted on each shaft is connected by a
sleeve having internal projections.
Power is tran mitted
through strips of pacldng fitted between the projecting
teeth in the hubs and sleeve.
Packing is retained at
each end by keeper ring and snap ring. Compensates
for misalignment in all directions without the use of
flexing materials.

-Roller

chain
(endless]

Fig. 295. In one design of Lovejoy Tool Works


flexible coupling, individual free-floating load cushions

hung between the flange jaws on removable studs.


These replaceable cushions are made of brake-lining
material, leather or rubber-duck fabric, depending on the
are

loads sustained
tion is needed.

and the resUience required.

No

lubrica-

Fig. 296.

&

The

positive drive design of

Diamond

Manufacturing Company consists of two


sprockets connected by a length of roller chain.
Clearance between sprockets and chain side plates
allows freedom to compensate for misahgnment in all

Chain

directions.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

160

Flexible -

member
4Jaws

'^

Composition

packing rings

lenl
,

(endless)

Chain
Oil level wiifi

Oil level

coupling al
rest

running

when

coupling

is

The Poole Engineering & Machine ComFig. 297.


pany uses a two-piece floating sleeve with the internal
gear teeth cut at each end, meshing with gear teeth on
hubs. Toothed hubs are mounted at the end of each
The hub teeth have spherically formed
shaft.
crowns. The teeth are in mesh around their entire
Compensates for misalignment in all
circumference.
directions without the use of flexing materials.
Bearing surfaces are lubricated in a bath of oil.
Dust is
excluded by packing ring at either end.

chain

re laiper
slol

Fig. 298.
Fig. 299.
Fig. 298.
A silent chain is used as the flexible member
in the Morse Chain Company coupling, the load being
A series of retaining
distributed over a number of teeth.
Hnks, running in the center of one sprocket, keep the
chain in place. Flange covers enclose the chain when

necessary.
Convex jaw surfaces that exert a rolling
Fig. 299.
pressure when loaded are used in another Lovejoy Tool
Works coupling design. The convex surfaces are so
proportioned that the compression is uniform over the
The floating spider is
entire area of each spider arm.
made of a resilient material which gives flexibility in all

directions.

Fig. 300. This T. L. Smith Company type of


coupling has a flexible metal ring engaging projections
integral with the outer and inner hubs.
A packing
ring protects the interior from dirt, yet compensates
for angular misalignment.
The coupling can drive in
either direction.

Fig. 301.
In this Meriam Company design, the internal and external hub is connected by a series of spring
steel rollers fitted into semicircular recesses in each hub.
The rollers are made of strip steel, wound spirally and
ground on the periphery. Quiet operation is secured by
packing the interior of the coupling with grease or ground
cork.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

161

SHAFT DIAMETERS FOR TORSION AND BENDING


B
500,000

D=J^

-650

M-^ + T^

400,000

15

Example: Given f= 6,000 lb. persq.inBending momen+ M= 100,000 in.-lb.


Torsional mornen+ T = 50,000 in.-lb.
Determine equivalent bending mornen+

16

300,000

600

Join 100 on horizontal A scale +o50on


vertical A 5cale. This length scaled off
on vertical A scale is the equivalent
bending moment= 111,000 in.-lb.
Join

111,000

on B scale to 5,000 on^f


to read 4.6"

and extend line


diam. on left scale

scale

IH -

-550
200,000 -^

150,000

-500

1.5

-450 c
o

lb

0)

-400

c
ty

E
o

.5^16
O

-350

.E

300 i
D
>

E-^ie

cr
II

3^-_

15,000

Nofe: For ordinary power -transmission


shafting use 6,000 lb. per sq. in. for
fhe allowable working stress

5,i

-^

E-7

Bending Moment,in Thousands Inch- Pounds

-rr

I
I

500

450

-200

4^--

16

"^

20,000-

4,4^16

6,2

-250

400

ri

350

300

250

200

I
I

150

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

162

-b c

" w

to

(u-t-

C>
a.

^*-

<u

---

2
c

(i)

o,__

-C-l-

-I-

-^

LCD 4= D

S =

E"-<
D

_=.4_

LLl

U|-LUD_ia 4J.DLI5

2o~oof^iDiri^
llllllllllhlllll

fc

llllhllllllhl

CM

ll

'^l"=l'

L.

I
o
o
o

o
o
o
o

o-

o
o

llllllllll.i.

o
o
o

y
o

nl(llll,l

o
o

Inn

IiiiJmmI

q"|_"ui'snbjoj^

/^

iii|ii

i|

Mi |ii
i

i| ii

i|i

i|
|

o_

oo
o o
o
o

iiii

iii

ni

i| II

|i

1
1

'SS3J4S

'q-]

U-^

(M""

/I
o/oooo
o
o o
* o

o
Q

<M

ro

I
I

.el-l

in

mi|l|

ll ll

O
O
CM

rj-

|IIII|IIII|IIII|IIM|IIII|

oopo
^

1/^

K1

'1

/
/
/

O o

ro

cN

II

I
I


4J.D4S

j.0

Lj^BuaT

\^

jsd

-uji/j

u; uoi43a|j.aa

uoisjoj_

I
I

tN

O
O

Lu-d-y

li ii ii II 11

Mi

O
O
O
O O
O f^

O
O

iiii[iiii|illll l lll

iiiii

O
O o
O O
O
ltT ^-

/
l/{

|IMI|MI^^IIII{IIII|IIII|
P^WijttWi

|l|l|l|

bj jsd

-ui

> ii

hrS"

|IIII{IIM|IIII|

ja/v\od3SJO|-|

'

iii i|i

'
ii|

/
m

CJ

Iilihllliillliill

llllllllllllllll/llllllllllllllllllllilllilliril

O'

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS


o
o
o

o
o
o

>

liiiihiiilii nil

03

-S)

C ?4-

uf '"bs

o
o

jsd

'qi 'ssaj42

o
o
o
1

163

o
o
o
llllll

II ll

I'll

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

164

SHAFT DIAMETERS BASED ON THE


Bending Moment,

to

rj-

A.S.M.E.

in 1,000 In.-Lb.

ir>

f^

to

00

_]

B
0-

2-

3-

M
I

4-

8 4H
o

7-

E
o
"5

8-

10

10

14

12-" 15-

16-

CODE

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS


SHAFT DIAMETERS BASED ON THE

A.S.M.E.

Bending Moment^ in
D

1,000 In.-Lb.

CODE

(Continued)

165

166

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

TWO -BEARING SHAFTS OF UNIFORM STRENGTH


Values of ""

Q,

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8 0.9

1.0

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

167

STRESS IN A ROTATING DISK


N
50110

Maximum
disk

IS

+angen+ial stress
given by the relation

I'n

a thin rotating

71wN^x lO'^ [C3+m)R^+(l-m)r^]


Rand r are radii in in.
N= angular velocity in 1,000 r.p.m.
m= Poisson's ratio for the moten'al
w= density in lb. per cu.in.

S=

S= maximum tangential
(if

\^

lllll

10

10

100,000

45
lb.

per sq.in.

use light face scales for R^randN)

4
I

20

Q.

10

(L

II

II

II

II II

15

in

40

13

o\

R exceeds

stress

215
I

II

II

ai

--

o
o

45

40

35

50

.c

50

Outside Radius^ R

35 -1-7 g

1^

4-

R=5, r = and m= 0.35,


v\/ith w=0.4, a disk rotating 30,000 r.p.m. will be
subject too maximum tangential stress of
214,000 lb. persq.in.

Dotted

,5"

lines

show that for

Q.

o
o
o

ir

Density

in Lb.

per Cu.
0.15

In.

-<,^

0.2

0.>^

0.4 0.5 0.60?

lLlU

tn

"Copper

-Steel

inside Radius, r

Cast iron

D
01

=6^

168

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


VELOCITY CHART FOR GEARS AND PULLEYS

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

169

FLAT -BELT LENGTHS AND PULLEY DLA.METERS


The chart on the

following page

is

used for the

calculation of belt lengths for open belt drives,

The

length of a belt can be calculated with

accuracy for
from the formula

L=
C =

engineering problems

all

+ ^ rf(n +

L = 2C
where

Calculation of Step

drives.

sufficient

rf2(n

1)

(32)

4C

distance

L =

= smaU pulley diameter


= speed ratio
D = large pulley diameter
D = nd

and they cannot be shown


the Eq. (32) is divided by
take the form as follows
If

For further

d/C

l)+g(n-

simplification, let

The equation

y.

+-y{n

will

C =

is

140.375

is

and 5.
4, and

50

and the

in.,

The value

in.

of

belt length

L/C =

is

2.81 will

For the speed ratio n = 2, read vertically from


2.81 to where this line intersects the ray
of the speed ratio 2.
Follow horizontally to
d/C, and read 0.17. When d/C = 0.17, then

C,

L/C =

x and

=
=

d
Z)

(34)

50

in.

=
=

8.5 in.

=
17

8.5 in.
in.

For the speed ratio n


3, d/C = 0.126 is
obtained from the chart in a similar manner.
Therefore

then become

ly

0.17

D=

it

(33)

in a

1)2

+ y\n -

1)

3, 4,

2,

L/C =

it

^ = 2+^^(n +

four-step cone pulley drive

be the same in each instance.

Any type of graphical solution of the equation


not simple in this form, because there are four

simple chart.

that the diameter of the small pulley d = Bin. is


the same as in the preceding example.
Center

distance between pulley centers

will

Example.

Cone Pulley Drives

required with speed ratios n of

belt length

variables in

enough for

Assume that one speed ratio, namely, n


1)2

is

(32), the chart values are close

ordinary belt length calculations.

all

and pulley

step cone pulley sizes for open belts,

diameters on V-belt

by Eq.

0.126
3

50

6.3 in.

=
=

6.3 in.

18.9 in.

n = 4, as in the preceding
= 0.10 and d = 5 in. Then
D = 4 X 5 in. = 20 in.
= 5, d/C = 0.083 on
speed ratio

For the speed

ratio

example, d/C

Equation (34) contains only three variables, of


which n, the speed ratio, is usually known. The
equation can be plotted on ordinary coordinate
paper as in the accompanying chart. The following examples show how to use it.

Belt Length for


Example.

Assume the small pulley diameter


=

0.10.

4,

C =

From d/C =

and the
50

in.

dis-

Then

2.81.

Therefore

in.

52(4

1)2

^^^^
=

Although there
length

is '^i in.

as obtained

= 4.15 in.
= 20.75 in.

In this instance, the steps of the driven pulley


be 4.15, 5, 6.3, and 8.5 in. diameter, mating

with steps on the driving pulley of 20.75, 20,


18.9,

and 17

in.

diameter, respectively.

Pulley Diameters for V-belt Drive


Example.
is

120

If

of

the speed ratio n

the pitch length

in.,

140.375

in.

difference in the belt

from the chart

C = 40

an endless
and the

4,

in.,

find the

pitch diameters of the pullej^s.

in the Eq. (32), the solution will be

100-1-^5(4+1)+

50

4.15in.

distance between centers


140.5

Substituting the numerical values given in this

example

\vill

V-belt

L = C X 2.81
L = 50 X 2.81 =

0.083

0.10 on the

trace horizontally to the speed ratio


4 and follow vertically downward to read

L/C =

chart,

?i

D=

Open Drive

d = 5 in., the speed ratio n


tance between pulley centers

d/C = ^io

For the

the chart so that

figures

and

then d/C = 0.1216 is read at the


intersection of the lines L/C and speed ratio
M = 4. Therefore
If

L/C =

3,

D =

X 40 = 4.864 in.
X 4 = 19.456 in.

0.1216
4.864

A V-belt manufacturer's catalogue is then consulted to ascertain pulley outside diameters.

170

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


CHART FOR FLAT-BELT LENGTHS AND PULLEY DIAMETERS

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS


FLAT-BELT SPEED -HORSEPOWER CHARTS
The fransmission copac/iy of a be/f or chain drive

from ihe

is

ca/cula'iecl

fi

per min

relaiionship

Nei i-urning force in


'V,
Ft Id. per

Horsepower

speed in

mm perhp.

,,

lb.

_(T|-T2)V_(T|-T2)TrclN
33,000

33,000

^ys

The iension on Ihe lighl side minus Ihe lension


" ^'he loose side of a chain or bell. If is Ihe
effeclive pull.
V= The bell or chain velocily in ff per min. and is

( T| - T2I =

^^J
'

,^

"-^

equal lo Ihe producf ofrr limes D, Ihe diameler


of Ihe pulley in feel, limes N^ lis r p.m.
for a given flaf belf Ihe values of(^^-Tq\
c^^ per inch of widlh is usually known. For

-^

V lype

belfs

il is

given per bell

In

chain

fransmission, T^ is usually zero, hence


^
"5

CTj-T^) is Ihe a/lowable working load


chain as in roller chains or per

nominal widlh, as m silenf

line indicafes Ihalfor

N= 600
5.

7per

and
in.

TfT2=60,
widlh of belf

171

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

172

BELT HORSEPOWER CHARTS


Determining Belt Tension Resulting from Centrifugal Force

30

wv
~Q~

fn Lb.

per

In.

40 50 60

80

lOp

Wid+h

horsepower chart on the preceding page enables the designer to


obtain the linear velocity of the belt in a given drive. In the illustrative example
given with that chart, the linear velocity of the belt was shown to be 3,160 ft. per min.
By assuming a belt whose unit weight is 0.15 lb. per ft. per in. width, the additional
belt tension set up by centrifugal force can be obtained from the chart on this page.

The

fiat-belt

point in the vertical scale designating 0.15 in. per ft. per in. width, trace
horizontally to the right to the point representing a velocity of 3,160 ft. per min., as
Then drop down vertically to the horizontal scale,
indicated by the diagonals.

From the

which gives the value

of

WV^/G

as 13

lb.

per

in.

width of

belt.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

1,000

900
800
700

600

500

400

300

250
200

10

173

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

174

FLAT-

AND V-BELT HORSEPOWER CHARTS

the half angle of the V groove for V-type belt.


the angle is equal to 90 deg. and sin /3 is

Sin

is

For a

flat belt,

equal to

1.

of Ti can be determined from the


breaking strength of the material and the factor of safety

The working value

of e^'" ^ can be obtained from the


the coefficient of friction, and
The relathe angle 8 of the arc of contacts are known.
tion between Ti, the tight side tension, and Ts, the slack
side tension, can be found from the accompanying chart.
Example. A flat belt operating on a 20-in. diameter
puUev is making 600 r.p.m., the arc of contact is 165 deg.
Assume Ti equal to 120 lb. per in. of width, the belt
to

The value

be used.

accompanying chart

if

v,

weighs 0.150

lb.

per

ft.

per

width and has a coeffiFind the horsepower the

in. of

cient of friction equal to 0.25.


belt can transmit.

the speed-horsepower chart on page 171, it is


v, the velocity of the belt, equals 3,160 ft.per
min. The quantity ww-Zff may be calculated or determined
from a chart on page 172.
To find e''*, enter this chart at the horizontal line which
represents the value of angle of arc of contact equal to
Trace right to the diagonal representing a
165 deg.
value of V equal to 0.25, and then upward to the diagonal
labeled 90 deg., which represents a flat belt, then right
to the curve and then down to the scale where we read

From

found that

ef^ equal to 2.1.

1098

6 5

By substituting this value of e sin /3 or, as in this


example, e*** in the preceding equation, the value of
Ti T- may be calculated. With this quantity known,
and the use of the chart on page 171, the horsepower per
inch of width of belt may readily be obtained.
yue

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS


CHART FOR FINDING V-BELT LENGTHS
Diameter of Small Sheave
Size of
ropes,

in.

Min.diams.

recommended

4
32^16

Permissible

175

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

176

SHORT-CENTER BELT DRIVES


Calculations for the Arc of Contact and Length of Belts

When an

idler pulley

is

used to increase the

on the driving pulley,

arc of belt contact

it

becomes necessary to calculate that increase to


obtain the belt length. In the figure below,
center lines are drawn connecting pulley centers.
Solving for the belt wrap

on pulley

d,

d-\-D^
2 sin

{4>

A)

d
2 sin

{4>

2 sin (0
.sin

(0

A)

{d

=
2

<l>

A =

sin~

will

by

+ A)

D2)

V^^ +

52

+ D2) sm~^
2 y/A^ + 52
{d

=
=
=

180 deg.

180 deg.

The

D^

V^' +

180 deg.
180 deg.

D-d

angles

2C
4>

{<f>

+ A) - A
+ 33 deg. -

(-4.5 deg.)

14.5 deg.

A
sin~'

Equation

B^

sm"
B'

a
01

+
+

(<#.

VA^ + W
wnere

or

A)

of belt

is

+ e +F +G + H + J

for the length

L = E

57.3

d (180 deg.

<t>)

57.3

+ A
2

<t>

which the angle of approach a


sin

a+

203 deg.

=
=

interpolating.

For the example shown on the chart on the


next page, the arc of belt contact on pulley d
will be

then be
d

in

A)

angle of belt contact on the driving pulley

The

above the center line, angle A will be


if 4 is below the center Une, angle A
The scale A in the chart can be
will be plus.
used for either plus or minus values but the sign
preceding the angle A must be kept in mind.
When values of A are less than 1, values of angle
A must be interpolated. For e.xample, when A
is between + 0.5 in., angle A is less than +2 deg.
and is read on the scales "A" and "angle A in
is

minus, and,

deg."

\/A''

<i>

When A

Having an Idler Pulley

is

= sm"

D-d
2C

and A can be found on the

57.3

G = C cos a
H = Dta.n (90 deg. J = dtun (90 deg. -

chart,

V4>

+ X)
+ y)

In the foregoing equations, values for the


various symbols are calculated as follows:
.

_i

B--

D+d
Va + (c - By

D-d

sin

2C
2

+ D,
VA- + B^

2)2/2 cos

\(C

- B)-

4>

sin"

tan'^

y = sm

lA

tan^^

-5

- A

\
^/

D2/2

sin

/ D2/2 cos < - i4 \


\B - >2/2sin <^/

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

177

SHORT -CENTER BELT DRIVES


A

III

Inches

in

X
20

O'l

20'

10

Procedure:-

Connec+ on A-scale with 12 on B-scale


follow the ray on C-scale to Y-scale and connect
A on X"Sccile giving A = 4.5deq.
Connect point on Y-scale with (CI+D2)
on Z-scale giving (^+A) = 33deg.

0.15

to value of

y
IIIIIIII

NII
|

30

^T\y\

20

10

I
I

Angle AyAxx Degrees

Example:-d = 5in., D2= 8 in.^


A = (-lln.')or less than tin.,
B= 12 in., C= 50 in., and
D=30in.

0.4

10

20

Va^+b^

40

30

\
\

Angle f^+.4)

\^

|illlllTtl|IIIIIMII|lllll

in

II

Degrees
I

1:

loi

04
B

iiiii

30N,

40

50

20

20
I

10

30
I

ni
04

i__i

Inches

in

55

\r
^

(d + D2)in Inches

60

^1

40

50

III

20

30
I

II

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

178

CHART FOR CALCULATING NEEDLE BEARINGS


4,000 -

(T)

3,500 -

n^

irt

o
o
o

o o
o
o
o o
'^

o
o

o\ o o
o \o o

o
o
in

Revolutions per Minu+e

\
3,000 -

Safe load from needle bearings


6,000

W=

',

W=

load on bearing

number

effecfive roller lengfh in

= roller

in lb.

of rollers

diameter

in.

in in.

p.m.

r.

Nld

2,500 -

ao5
2,200 -

0.1

_L

2,000 -

1,500

I.I

02

-V

i\

16

32

d,

1,700

<

Diam.of

0.25

\32

03

32 4

16

Roller, vinches

\
\

\
\
\

1,300

\
\

1,200

Pivof Scale
1,000

si

900

V,

^^.

c?

700-

ID

600-

90

80

show a needle bearing with 25 rollers


af 2,240 r.p.m. will safely carry a load of

Index lines

_j

800

100

/
/

g'*-i

897

70

lb.

Load figures are based on contacting surfaces


hardened to Rockwell C-51 and accurate alignment
60

50

_l

5f

500

y^..
.^"

40

400 -

^-w--

350 -

30^
300 -

^)25.

25020

200 eo

58

59

170 -

54
53
52
57
56
55
Rockwell C Hardness Number

51

50

The curve shows that the bearing load Wof


8971b. ata bearing hardness of C-51, may be
Increased to 1.500 lb. at hardness of C-60

150 -

130 -

l-Length of

Cyli/ider

8/

7
_1

c^

2
1

I'n

In.

Dimension 1 shown

is the effective
length of the cylindrical portion
excluding rounded or projecting ends

17

- 15

12

10

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

179

THRUST BEARING FRICTION MOMENT DETERMINATIONS


750

-]-

1500

Chorf for obfoining friction

momenf Mf

for solid sfiaff


face Square wiih Hie
axis and fa/<ing a ifirusf load
p as given by me equafion

wifh

'00

1400

end

2Pf R
650

600

-|-

1300

f= CoefficlenloffricHon
R = Radius of shaft
R
P-

1200

550

500

--

450 --

400

350
c
01

300

250 --500

200

ISO --

100

50

For the rapid calculation of frictional resisting moments, a chart such as shown
by the illustration on this page for a solid shaft with end face square with the axis
may be constructed. In using this chart, it is merely necessary to connect the given
values of P and / as found on their respective scales by a straight Line. Where this
line, shown dotted in the chart, crosses the diagonal, join this point with the given
value of R as found on the scale, and extend to the left-hand scale where will be found
the desired friction moment.

known, the power

If

the friction

moment and

lost in friction can be calculated.

the speed of the shaft are

180

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS


BEARING BRONZES GROUPED ACCORDING TO FIELDS OF USE
15

10

0)

181

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

182

SHAFT SEALS

grease lubrica-

groove

is

Fig. 305.
This design makes it
easy to replace the cork or felt
ring.
In some instances, the depth
of the counterbore is doubled and

two

Sometimes this type


used without sealing rings.

Fig. 303.

used
frequently, the effecti-veness of the
seal increasing with the number of
grooves, of which there should be
at least two.
tion, the half-round

is

and

Fig. 308.
309.
Labyrinth

only
felt ring is

depended upon

The tapered

to perfect the seal.


walls tend to press the

sealing ring against the shaft.

One method of applying


Fig. 306.
a simple leather seal.

rings are used.

Figs. 308

Usually
groove with a cork or

Fig. 309.

and groove

seals can

effectiveness.

be combined

Fig. 307.
A simple design of
labyrinth seal.
Centrifugal force
prevents the entrance of foreign
particles while grease or oil lubricant on the shaft is thrown outward, thus filling the labyrinth
opening.

for greater

Addition of a slinger
Fig. 310.
helps materially to prevent liquids
finding their way through the seal.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

183

m
Standard lop endpiston rings. Bore]
\same as for standard piston bores
^and grooves 0.003"to0.006"wider
than rings

For slow speeds, two


mounted as shown can
be used. The set collar is sometimes counterbored and two small
Fig. 311.

Fig. 312.

The common labyrinth

Fig. 313.

Company

shaft seal.

cork rings

Left,

seal.

Chicago Rawhide

Right, Gits Brothers

Manufacturing Company seal. They


can be used for sealing in either direction, the spring maintaining pressure
between the leather and the shaft.

springs placed in the counterbore


with a covering washer that bears

against the sealing ring.

Fig. 314.
Cooke-type seal that embodies the patented principle of maintaining contact between the stationary

and moving

Fig. 316.

Fig. 315.

Anotlier application of the

Cooke seal. Metal bellows permit


tive movement.

rela-

surfaces.

An

effective

bearing

ball or

seal.

roller-

Fig. 317.

Illustrates the principle of the

water

seal.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

184

ROLLER-BEARING SEALS
'Slinger
holes ensure
safuralion of

\t^Slinger closure

^ Oil

for excluding

wofer

fell

Oil grooves

Me /o/- seal ring

Fig. 319.

Fig. 318.

n ^^>/y//A
-

iSoff felf
I

seal

Fell musf make

Wire snap ring


holds seal in
place

good confacf
wifh shaff

Permanenf mefal
seal bears againsf
inner ring of roller
bearing
Fig. 321.

Fig. 320.

^-Slingers--^
Slinger
.f

Oil holes drilled

for safuralion

of

Feli

'

fell

Sfofionary mefal
ring seals

Mefal seals

felf

Fig. 323.

Fig. 322.

Labyrinffi siingers^
(

drilled fo

ensure safurafion of

musf be

accurafely machined

-.

'Felf
Fell

Annular

oil

grooves

Fig. 324.

Mefal sealing ring


Fig. 325.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS


'

Me-tal
sealing

185

S linger

ring
/Spring
/

washer
Leaiher

Meial sealing ring


Fig. 326.

Fig. 327.

Fig. 328.

Removable
closure Felf

Fell

Fig. 329.

Fig. 330.

Removable

Fig. 331.

Feli

re+ainer

Fell

-Leaiher

Mei'ol sealing rings

Fig. 332.

Me laI sealing rings

Fig. 333.

""Melal sealing ring

Fig. 334.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

186

SLEEVE-BEARING SEALS

Leather
packings
Fig. 340.
Fig. 339.
Fig. 338.
For retaining lubricant, the seal is assembled with the flanged leather projecting toward the bearing.
Fig. 338.
The leather packing is clamped near the outer edge of the flange by the inner of two telescoping metal cups, a tight
Should
jomt at the face being thereby assured. A garter-type spring compresses the leather about the shaft.
misalignment occur, the seal is maintained by virtue of the flexibility of the leather and garter spring. To dram
small hole is drilled in the casting connecting the reservoir.
off the surplus oil passing the end of the bearing, a
Installation of double seal unit for retaining lubricant in bearing recess and for guarding against
Fig. 339.
except that two
entrance of foreign material. The seal is of the same general construction as shown in Fig. 338

flanged leathers are mounted opposed to each other.


Used for the same general purposes as the arrangement shown in Fig. 339. The seal has but one
Fig. 340.
The leather washer for dust exclusion shown at right has a beveled
garter spring for the oil-retention leather flange.
shaft.
the
contacts
lip which

Corker
lealher

iLeaiher
'

packing

Gorier ^l
spring

Feh
pacl^ing

Oil"'^
return

Oil- Seal

hole

Sometimes

the seal in place of leather shown


Both sealing
in Figs. 339 a,nd 340.
materials are retained by spinning
the outer casing over the leather

Where there is conFig. 342.


siderable difference in the diameters, the face of the shoulder thus
formed can be utilized as the sealsoft ring of cork or
ing surface.
leather is beveled at the outer

clamping cup.

surface

Fig.

Figs. JJ3 lo J4J inci


Courlesy of Lin i verso I

Oil refurn

hole
341.

used on the dust-exclusion

felt

is

side of

flat spiral
as sho%vn.
spring, coiled to a greater diameter
than the hole in the sealing mate-

expands the packing outward


against the beveled ring and wedges
it against the face of the shaft
shoulder.
rial,

Company

Working on the same


Fig. 343.
wedging principle as that shown in
Fig. 342, except that the packing

beveled on the inner surface and


retained by a sheet metal flange.
The cork or leather sealing material is compressed against the two
bearing surfaces by a garter spring
Seals shown here and
as shown.
in Fig. 342 are limited to approxi-

is
is

mately Yii

in.

end play.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

Courtesy Gih Bros.

Courtesy Naiiona/
Motor Bearing

Manufacturing

Company^

Co.

Courtesy of the Chicago


f^awhide t^anufacturingCo.

Inc.

When grease

is used as a
sometimes desirable to
assemble a single seal to keep dirt
from reaching the bearing rather than

Fig. 344.
Another type of seal
wherein a bronze ring bears against
the shoulder of the shaft. The sealing
material is in the form of a dia-

Fig. 345.
lubricant, it

phragm

of heat-resisting fabric which


retains oil in the bearing and excludes

retain the grease in the bearing.

In the flanged member that is


screwed to the housing is a series of
compression springs which hold the
ring
against the shaft shoulder.
These springs not only take up wear
but provide for end play of the shaft.
To avoid torsional strain on the diaphragm, guide pins are used between
the outer flange and spring bearing
washer.

wherein a right-hand spiral groove is


cut in the bearing bore to lead the
lubricant outward.
Surplus grease is
forced past the seal, thereby keeping
the bearing clean.

dirt.

illustration

is

shows

an

The

installation

Washe.

187

Fig. 346.
Leather flange seal
with garter spring mounted in a
flanged end plate.
Spring tension is such as to give small
area of contact between leather
and shaft, thereby minimizing
friction. A bronze thrust
washer is between the bearing
and the bearing housing.

Bushings

Washer

-Dust
seal

cup

Fig. 347.
The labj^rinth seal shown does not rely on nonmetallic
materials but on the small clearances with the assembly.
A steel washer contacting a bronze thrust washer is clamped against the shaft shoulder after the
formed dust seal cup is pressed into the counterbored hole.

Courtesy of the
Garlocd: t^anufactur-

ing

Company

Fig. 348.
When oil seals are to be
installed after a mechanism has been assembled or to preclude the necessity of
disassembling heavy shafts and bearings
when making seal renewals, split seals
can be used in such installations. The
spreader spring and packing ring are
split, whereas the retaining cup is made
in two halves.
The packing is scarf-cut
to form an oiltight joint when assembled.

Fig. 349.
Another mounting of small worm-drive shaft for
domestic washing machine and domestic stoker. The composition
sealing material is held against the shaft by a V-formed spreader spring
having serrated edges which nest into the sealing ring. The angle of
the V in the spring is greater than the groove in the seal so that the
fingers of the spring exert a light pressure on the sealing lip.
An oil
return hole is drilled outside the bearing to relieve built-up pressure
against the seal.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

188

SAFETY GEARS

25ieeih ^pHch
for roller chain

H
9 springs

64

outside diame+er

0.

Load=

2 spn'ngs
M"
outside diameter

109

1100

32

"diam. wire

lb.

per

Test = load 35 to 40

in.

lb.

0.040"diam. wire

travel per turn

on 20

in.

radius lever

Fig. 350.

Load = 26

lb.

per

in.

travel per turn^ for noise

Fig. 351.

10

6 springs
g2.

outside diam,

Load=

0.080"diam wire
Load= 259 lb per
in.

lb per
per turn
Test = load 60 to 65
lb. on 20 in. radius
lever

travel per turn

1,100

Test= load 56 lb
on 18 in. radius
ever

in. travel

Fig. 352.

springs

outside diam.

0.109 diam. wire

341-8 P

maker only

Test= load 25to281b.ona 57in. radius lever

Fig. 353.

POWER TRANSMISSION ED'EMENTS AND MECHANISMS

13

'springs
3l

32 outside diameter

springs
diameter
0.109 diam.wire
12

64 outside

0.092"d;am^w(re

Load = 814

Ib.per in. travel per turn


Test=load 50to60 Ib.on 20in. rod lever

Load
Test

1,100 lb.

per

in.

travel per turn

load 65 to 75 b.on 60 in. rod. lever

Fig. 354.

Fig. 355.

20 springs
3,,.
64 outside diameter
0.109" diam.wire

Load

1,1001b.

per

Test= load 65 to 70

in.

lb.

travel per turn

on 60

Fig. 356.

in.

radius lever

189

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

190

SHIFTING MECHANISMS FOR GEARS AND CLUTCHES


,

^W'

Shiff coflar
wiih -frunnions

Reclongular
bronze shoe

Eccentric-'^

crank /h- fh
fegrol on
shaft

Adjusioble

^Nuifor end play


odjusfmeni'

^3 nuf

for

assembly

Fig. 357.

Fig. 358.

Fig. 359.

Screw aoljusfs clearance


between clutch d/sks

[Shifting lever attached to this shaft

,^

ving

/H

r
.

f-*i I

Gear segment

[Shifting fork,

Driven
disk

Thrust bearing
Positioning nut
I

Over running

clutch drives d/sk

Rack teeth In hub engage


gear segment
Fig. 361.

Fig. 360.

<-Shaft

cutaway for clearance


/Shifting Fork

Gear
Shifting

Turned grooves
^position rods

rod^

Cffl^;>.

Fork

Screw fastens'
fork to shift rod

''Slot position

^Spring plunger

screw
Fig. 362.

'

Fig. 363.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS


Eccenirically

fumed

^^Bell

^-'Adiusfinq

nJf

shiffing collar

191

crank shifting fork


ShifHng
center

'SfeeUhoeCrecianqular)^'^^^^'
oHached fo fork 'by
inseriSd pins

^^^

'^'"^^^

^Driving

member

Fig. 364.

Fig. 365.

Operafing
f'Upper surface
of shiffing bar
has milled feelh

pinion

Shaff mo vable
longifudinally

Clufch releasing
fork engages

flange

Flange free
fo rofafe on

''

bushing
Sfafionary
shaff

'-Spacing

bushing
Fig. 366.

MounHng'

Fig. 367.

Rack

\r

^,-,

.'Pinion

Shiffing fork

screwed and
doweled fo
sliding rack

Shiffing

bar of

Iflafsfock

Clufch groove

'

Fig. 368.

^Pinion
Fig. 369.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

192

Shifting shoe clamped


to shaft/

Sliding bar
^y C^ufcl^ siiifiing lever
fi
inio yofre
/Basiling force fified
/Bushing

seal for lever and


roci< serves as sec
rocl<
provides means for locking

J
Pivoi

Positioning

grooves

^Light-duty
gears

T^

JIT

<1

Fig. 374.

/Locking pawl

Pawldisen-

Spring -backed ball drops info


hemispherical siois io lock clutch

gaging levep

/Screwed

Fig. 370.
I

re fains shifling shoe)


allows slight roiafi'on of
shoe when gears are en-

, - -^Pln
'

gaged

Lever rocks -'

to

main costing

Gear housing

to

entire gear
case

Handle end
locks into

Bell

counterbored hole

''

crank

-Counter-

Pivot

bored
hole

Boll endedpin

engages

bellcrank

Fig. 375.

Slot
Fig. 371.

Clutch

member

Bearing
housing/

Lever which - - actuates locking


plunger

Lru-^^

'

Vh/ft
fork

Shift fork'

i bearing
A
-Locks
to clutch member
'/

j-

'

Trunnion

'Holds bearing housing


Fig. 372.

Locking plunger^

Solid yoke

Flange holds-,
yoke in place

Accomo

Shift,
1

rod

dates yoke
trunnions

^Shiff lever keyed


^Shifting shaft

Fig. 373.

to

rod

Fig. 376.

free

turn in bearings

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

193

Cluster

Clusfer^

Shlfi- handle

Fig. 378.

Fig. 377.

Posi-f-ioning phie
cr

~_r

Screw en-

y Hand /ever-.

Cam,

f'

f-j.
^^

wifh counier-

sunk spo-fs which engage spriYwbacked locking plunger

gages cam

Fo/rk

GecrshafI

Sere

Spring- backed

Section

Fork^

Drive

shafi

'

kn

^/

/
j.^u
Dogc/ufch

x-x

KH
^t3

"s

locking plunger
Pins iimii amounf
of iravel of gears

Floaiing bevel gears

Fig. 380.

Fig. 379.

Fork swive led fo lever

\D pinned lo shafit

Spring-backed
[localing plunger

^ Levers shaped lo
keep Ihis distance

a minimum
Clusier

Lever F'

pinned +o
shafi E
Fig. 381.

194

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


,

Locking plunger

Handle
Pinion mounfed
rocker arm
and driven by D

^ on

engages clionge
gears

Rocker arm

Splined shaft
drives gears

Dandt
^^''Locking plunger

engages Ihese
nolches

-Locking plunger
I

engages Ihese
notches when
driving ofher
idler gears

Fig. 382.

Sec+ionX-X

Cam keyed
to shall B
Sec+ion Y-Y

Lever

same

mounied on
shall B as cam

'Dwell
'

Rolalion of cam moves


yokes to engage clusier gears
Fig. 383.

Circular rack enq

_,

fastened lo hollow's ha fI fo
which is allached shifling bar
Section
". "-^

Y-Y

Change gears separaled


by hardened ana ground

washers ^

T^
'Pivoi

33 - Hardened and

ground sliding
key

Section X"X
Fig. 384.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS


GIBS

AND GUIDES

Can be

shimmed

Zone- poinfed
i-

Screw ac/Jusfmeni'

\for gib

here

r screw adjusf\

merit
\

V/.

LT"
For light loads

Fig. 385.

'

S-tud fixed'
in gib

Fig. 393

^^

Fig. 386.

only
Fig. 387.

Fig. 388.

196

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

196
\

Dovei-oif gui'cfe in foble

Shims

Fig. 400.

Fig. 399.

[*- Table widih---^


\Guide

Angular -iapered
gib lakes up wear

Fig. 403.

Fig. 402.

Fig. 401.

Fig. 405.

Fig. 404.

Fig. 406.

^AdjusHng screw
^s

-*!

/'

^^,^;;^ looseness of gib


prevents backing our loo far^

Section A-A
Fig. 407.

rAdJusling screw

Section B-B

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

Fig. 410.

Fig. 409.

Fig. 408.

Shims for
odjusfrneni'

Fig. 412.

Fig. 411.

B-'
Fig. 413.

Miiii^

^5g^
Section A-A

^^Opposii-e fape red gibs ao/jusi gib

A'

Fig. 414.

Lr

,:T|Tn!*l^_4 -

197

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

198

CAM DESIGNS
Typical

Forms Used

in

Machine Design

Radial

Cam

with Roller
Follower

Yoke

Cam

Face

Cam

Radial

Cam

Heor+

Com

Sliding Contact

Toe and Wiper

with

Mushroom Follower

Conical Ca

Cam with Swinging


Follower

Cylindrical

Sptierical

End Cam

/*"?

:
Barrel

Cam

Plate

Cam

Dog Cam

Cam.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

199

VARIABLE-SPEED DEVICES
Driven cone^

Device

^-Driving cone

power between fixed parallel


shafts.
Convex disks mounted freely on a rocker arm and pressing
firmly against the flanges of the shaft wlieels by a coiled spring
form the intermediate sheave. Speed ratio changed bj^ moving
Fig. 415.

for transmitting

rocker lever.
No reverse possible, but driven shaft may rotate
above or below driver speed. Convex disk must be mounted on
self-aligning bearings to ensure good contact at all positions.

Fig. 416.
at

These speed cones are moimted

any convenient distance apart and conbj' a belt, whose outside edges consist

nected

of an envelope of tough, flexible, wearresisting rubberized fabric built to withstand

the wear caused by the belt edge traveling


at a slightly different velocity from the part
of the cone in actual contact.
Speed ratio
changed by sliding the belt longitudinally.

Shaft
-Drivinq
belt

Driven cone

^Squeezed
belt

Fig. 417.
Two cones mounted close
together and making actual contact through
a squeezed belt.
Speed ratio is changed by
shifting the belt longitudinally.

Taper on

cones must be moderate in order to avoid


excessive wear on the sides of the belt.

Fig. 418.
Another device to avoid belt
"creep" and wear in speed-cone transmissions.
The inner bands are tapered on the
mside and present a flat or crowned surface
to the belts in all positions.
Speed ratio is
changed bj' moving the inner bands rather
than the main belts.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

200

Universal Joinf^

Devices for avoiding belt wear when using speed cones. At left, creeping acting of belt is not entirely
Fig. 419.
eliminated, and universal joints present a problem of cost and maintenance. At right, a roller is substituted for the
belt, giving more compactness.

Oufpuf
shaft,

Rollers

/Driving
pulley

Driven^

f-

cone

"Rocker shaft
Fig. 420.
is

The

main component

a hollow cone driven by a conical

of this drive
roller.

Speed

changed by sliding driving unit in V guides.


Note that when the roller is brought to the center
of the hollow cone, the two run at identical speed
ratio

with the same characteristics as a cone clutch.


This feature makes the system attractive where
heavy torque at motor speed is required in combination with lower speeds for light preliminary
operations.

Fig. 421

In

this transmission, the cones are mounted

Une and supported by the same shaft. One cone is


keyed to the main shaft and the other is mounted on a
in

Power is transmitted by a series of rocking


and rollers. Pivoting rooking shafts and allowing
them to slide change the speed ratio.

sleeve.

shafts

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

201

TRANSPORT MECHANISMS
X

iTranspoH

A^

Top

of

rail

Pafh of

tronsporf

X-ArHcles

moved
Counterweights ^v

Cenier of
cran/i

arm

Pafh of
Shaff

D--

franspori

'-Paih
'Shoff

In this design, a rotary action is used. The shafts Z) rotate in unison and also support the main
Fig. 422.
moving member. The shafts are carried in the frame of the machine and may be connected by either a link motion, a
chain and sprocket, or by an intermediate idler gear between two equal gears keyed on the shafts. The rail AA is
A pressure or friction plate may be used to hold the material against the top of the rail
fixed rigidly on the machine.
and prevent any movement during the period of rest.

/Tronsporf

Conneciing
linl<

Bearing
Swivel arm

Palh

X=

^~ Driven

of iransporf

Arficles

arm
'Palh of Iransporf

moved

Fig. 423.
Here is shown a simple form of link motion which imparts a somewhat egg-shaped motion to the
transport.
The forward stroke is almost a straight line. The transport is carried on the connecting links. As in
are
Bearings
design in Fig. 422, the shafts
are driven in unison and are supported in the frame of the machine.

also supported

by the frame

of the machine,

and the

rail

AA

is fixed.

The

details of operation

can be understood

readily from the figure.

A = Top of roil
Fric lion slide C

Transport'-'

Palhof-'
fronsporf
Lifling lever

Slops

FricHon

roil

Lifting lever

Driving arm-'

X = Articles moved

Fig. 424.
Another type of action. Here the forward and return strokes are accomplished by a suitable mechanism, whereas the raising and lowering is imparted by a friction slide. Thus it can be seen from a study of the figure
that as the transport supporting slide B starts to move to the left, the friction slide C, which rests on the friction
rail, tends to remain at rest.
As a result, the lifting lever starts to turn in a clockwise direction. This motion raises
the transport which remains in its raised position against stops until the return stroke starts at which time the reverse
action begins.
An adjustment should be provided for the amount of friction between the slide and its rail. It can
readily be seen that this motion imparts a long straight path to the transport.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

202

Transport
-A=.
Top

Pafhof

of

rail

transport
Eccentric

Imk
Shaft F

Shaft ETie

Fig. 425.

and lowering

Here

rod '

Cam arm

an action such that the forward motion is imparted by an eccentric while the raising
accomplished by means of a cam. The shafts F, E, and D are located by the frame
Special bellcranks support the transport and are interconnected by means of a tie rod.
is

illustrated

of the transport

of the machine.

is

Path of

^y

Transport

Top of rail -^

'

X=Arficles

transport
Fig. 426.

This

X = A rti'c les moved

is

moved
The bearings C are supported

another form of transport mechanism wherein a link motion is used.


by the frame, as is the driving shaft D.

/Transport

Eccentric

Transport

^?fL

arms -/-/-T
-Path of

Cam -

transport

X= Articles

moved
X= Articles moved
Fig. 427.

'" '^ear B

An arrangement

'

'Path of
transport

of interconnected gears

which will impart a transport


motion to a mechanism, the gear and link mechanism
imparting both the forward motion and the raising
and lowering. The gear shafts are supported in the
frame of the machine.
of equal diameters

^-Shaft C-''

Fig. 428.
In this transport mechanism the forward
and return strokes are accomplished by the eccentric
arms, while the vertical motion is performed by the

cams.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

203

AUTOMATIC FEED HOPPERS


Roiafing

arms

^^ Refaining

finger

Roiafing

arms

Kicker
heel\

Chufe
slide

surface

^Hopper

Fig. 429.
The rotating arms of the nut hopper
push the nut blanks up the inohne into the chute.
The retaining finger holds several nuts and prevents
them from sliding back into the hopper.

Same type hopper and rotating arms as in


but a different chute, designed to feed bolts.
Kicker wheel at the mouth of the chute kicks back into
the hopper the bolts that do not enter the chute properly.
Fig. 430.

Fig. 429,

Tube conveyor

Hopper

Hopper

used for feeding


into a tube conveyer.
A reciprocating plunger picks up the
work at the lower end of the stroke and
deposits it in snap fingers at the end of
Fig.

431.

shell-like pieces

Fig. 432.

The hopper

is

sides ^

adjustable for feeding various lengths

and diameters of plain round stock, the pieces falling into the chute
by gravity. The agitator finger at either end of the work prevents
bridging or wedging of blanks over the chute opening.

the conveyer tube.


.-'In cenfer af iiopper -

Chufe slide surface

Oscillafing orrri-

FiG. 433.
An oscillating arm carries the blade through the center of the bolt hopper and at the top of its stroke
forms a continuation of the bolt chute. Sides of the hopper are inclined toward the center to feed bolts into the blade
at a low position in the hopper.
One blade is used for each diameter of stock handled, tapered spacers in hopper being
adjustable to accommodate varying widths of blade.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

204

Guard.

Tilting hopper for small rivets and


Fig. 434.
screws, in which the work falls into a slot at the bottom center of the hopper, which is tilted to the same
angle as the chute.

Rotating hopper set at angle is slotted


Fig. 435.
at the lower face to feed into the chute small cupshaped objects, as shown at A, positioning them with
Should cups enter chute open-end
their open end up.
down, they will drop through selector slot in the chute;
thus only those correctly positioned are allowed to
proceed to the assembly point.

Chufe,

AcJ/'usfing

screws
Adjusting screws

Vertical rotating disk hopper for feeding


Fig. 436.
shouldered pieces to the chute. By adjusting the
hardened dog-point screws, it is possible to feed pieces
with a difference of only 0.010 in. on the diameter.

Hopper

Prongs

Fig. 437.
Another type of vertical rotating disk
hopper for feeding hollow cylindrical pieces having a
blind hole.
Prongs are mQled on the periphery of the
disk; these prevent work from being fed open end up
into the chute.

POWER TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND MECHANISMS

205

GLUE-APPLYING MECHANISMS

Direct glue dabbers such as this


Fig. 438.
are inexpensive and simple, but can be used
only when it is permissible for the quantity of
glue to be applied to vary and when the applicaThe
tion is to be made in strips or dots.
applicator, of any desired shapes, is held on the
end of a bent rod, all parts that immerse in
the glue being so shaped as to drain freely and
not to splash when entering the glue. A collar
on the rod serves as a stop to enable quick
resetting after its removal for cleaning, whereas
the linkage holding the applicator permits

adjustment over a wide range of positions.


The glue pot can be removed freely and usually
requires no securing device other than means to
prevent it from shifting.
In designing these mechanisms, the device

must allow only a minimum

of variation in the
consistency of the glue at the point of application.
Therefore the glue pot must be amply
large so that evaporation of the solvent will
Even
affect the glue consistency but slightly.
in transferring the glue, it should be exposed as
little as possible to the atmosphere.
In the
device shown here, its directness of application
and the simplicity of the parts in contact with
the glue give it a high rating for continuous

good performance.

Example of an indirect type of


Fig. 439.
gluing mechanism, similar in design to the
direct type except for the addition of the transThis makes it possible to apply
fer member.
glue to top surfaces and also to control in a
certain measure the thickness of the layer of
This mechanism is also of the
glue applied.
type that applies strips or dots rather than
films.
In all these designs, simplicity is of
greatest importance in order that the device
will be easy to keep clean, lubricated, and
adjusted.
With reference to all types of gluing mechanisms, the practice of exposing the glue to the
atmosphere after it has been applied and before
the closing or uniting operation, in order to
partly evaporate the solvent and thus make the
Such a
glue more tacky, must be avoided.
practice usually is a serious source of troubles
as many variable factors such as time, temperature, and atmospheric conditions enter in
and will seriously affect the efficiency of the
machine unless compensation can be made for
the variation in these factors and the time
element can be maintained constant by uninterrupted operation of the machine.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

206

\)i)j))///)/iii/i>>>> 1 >>'"''/' />/]

Film applicators are used much more extensively than those applying dabs, because they permit the
Fig. 440.
A direct-acting type of this class of device is shown
application of a uniform film of glue of any selected thickness.
here.
The material receiving the appUcation runs in contact with the wheel that dips in the glue, the application
being made to the under surface. Best results are obtained when the wheel runs at the same surface speed as the
In this class of glue applicators, greatest attention must be given to the design of the trimmer
material passing over it.
blade.
This blade must be adjustable, but it should be so constructed that in making the adjustment the blade will

keep

its

proper relation to the wheel.

In the indirect types of film applicator, a


Fig. 441.
transfer wheel receives glue from the main wheel and transfers
The clearance between the
it to the point of application.
transfer wheel and the main wheel is usually made adjustable.
On machines that must be stopped frequently, the drive to the
glue wheels should be independent of the drive for the main
machine so that the glue wheels can be kept revolving when
the machine is stopped, thus preventing the glue from drying
o\\

the surface of the wheels.

Fig. 442.
In this design of direct applicator,
the film of glue is applied to the upper surface
To keep the exact relation
of the sheet.
between the trimmer blade and wheel, there
must be a complete elimination of lost motion.
If a means for locking the trimmer blade in
position is provided, it should be so designed
that the act of locking will not disturb the setting.
It should also be possible to remove the
parts for cleaning without disturbing the setting.
The drive of the glue wheel should be
A belt
positive to ensure the proper speed.
drive is not to be recommended.
.

A type of gumming mechanism that is much in use in sheet-mounting machines and gumming
This type is easily cleaned and adjusted. When the rollers are long, consideration should be given to the
This deflection will result in
deflection in the center of the rollers due to the pressure exerted in squeezing out glue.
a thicker fiilm of glue in the center of the rollers than at the ends. This is usually compensated for by making the
glue roller larger in diameter in the center than at the ends. The device has no trimmer blade, but thickness of glue
Fig. 443.

machines.

film

is

regulated

by adjusting the gap between the

rollers.

CHAPTER

DRIVES

VII

AND CONTROLS
Page

Page

Significance of

WR^

208
211

Motor Load
of Motor Tjrpe

Analysis of
Selection

Form

214

Motors
218
Winding Connection Diagrams for Multi220
speed Motors
Inquiry

for Electric

'.

Electric Control

Methods

Operated Valves
Automatic Timers
Trigger Switch Mountings
Thermostatic Mechanisms
Automatic Stops
Electrically

207

224
231
234
237
242
248

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

208

SIGNIFICANCE OF WR^
In Drives for Machinery

Any moving body

has stored in

it

kinetic energy, the

portional to the mass of the body and to the square of


speed of a body is changed, the amount of kinetic energy

magnitude of which

is

pro-

its velocity.

Whenever the

increased,

and the increase

is

must be supplied from a source within the system. If the speed is decreased,
the kinetic energy of the body is decreased, and the energy lost must be absorbed by
some other part of the system.
moving with a hnear velocity V ft. per sec, the kinetic
In a body of mass
in energy

energy

in foot-pounds is

E = ImV' = 1(^j)v'
where

is

the weight of the body, in

lb.,

and

(35)

g is the acceleration of gravity, in

ft.

per sec. per sec.

mass as actually distributed is the same as an equivalent mass concentrated at a point distant from the
axis of rotation equal to the radius of gyration R of the body, the equivalent mass havThe kinetic energy E in foot-pounds then becomes
ing the same speed of rotation N.
In a body rotating at

Note that the term WR^

r.p.m., the kinetic energy of the

a physical term applying to a specific body; the term


of the body and a radius of gyration R which is determined by
involves the weight
the shape and dimensions of the body. The kinetic energy stored in a rotating body,
is

therefore,

is

proportional to

its

WR- and

to the square of

A'',

its

rotational speed.

Since Eq. (36) represents the kinetic energy stored in the body after speed A'' is
attained, this equation also represents the energy that must be suppUed from some
In mechanical-drive problems,
source, to accelerate the body from rest to A^ r.p.m.
however, energy as such is of little interest; the major concern deals with the torque
required to produce the acceleration.
It can be easily demonstrated that the torque

in pound-feet required to accelerate a

sec. is

- -

body from

rest to a

speed of

r.p.m. in

<-)

obvious that the term WR^ is also an important factor in


determining the torque required to produce a given acceleration.
By making use of the familiar equation

From Eq.

(37), it is

^P =
and Eq.

(37), it is

torque

/cs

^^^^

5,250

simple to determine the horsepower

required to accelerate uni-

DRIVES AND CONTROLS


formly the body from rest to a speed

"

r.p.m. in

A'^

sec,

209

by using an average speed N/2

TxN/2

(^9^)

5,250

WR'N'
10,500

WR'N'
3,234 X 10' X

308i

In mechanical systems with a number of rotating parts, the energy E^ stored in


is the sum of the energies stored in each part, or

the moving system

^'

W:R\N\ + W,R\N\ + W,RhNh +

+ W,.R\N\

,,.

(^^)

5;873

In power-drive and motor-application problems, it is advantageous to express


the energy Es in the system in terms of an " equivalent WR"^," which will be designated
here as W^R^s, at the drive or motor shaft having a speed of Nd, such that

E. =

By combining

WM\

= W^R\

Eqs. (40) and (41),

(^y +

W R^ N-^
1!^'

(41)

be seen that

it will

W,RS (^^y + W^R\ {^^y +

Wr^RJ (^)'

(42)

The torque
speed in

T^ necessary to accelerate uniformly a system at rest to a required


can be obtained by substituting WsR'\ for WR^, and Nd for A^" in Eq. (37),

sec.

which then becomes

WsR'sNd

(43)

dOSt

The horsepower H^

required to accelerate the system from the drive shaft at rest

to a speed of

Nd r.p.m.

in Eq. (39),

which then becomes

in

sec.

can be determined by substituting WsR^sN^d for

W R^ AT^

^
from Eq. (39a) by substituting
(43) which then becomes

or

jj

3,234
A''^

for

10^

N, and
iVd
Nd

VV
5-tVd y
_ WsR'sNd
s-t^

308t

WR'N^

5,250

for

^
^
2

T the

value of T, as given by Eq.

*y
WM'N'd
d
3,234 X 10^ X
s-tl-

-tV

Sometimes complex systems are encountered involving both


motion. The equivalent WR- of the linearly moving parts can

/j^rN
^

linear
also

and rotating

be reduced to

the motor-shaft speed by the equation

"Equivalent

WR'" =

Tf

(p^^Y
\ZTrI\

(46)

d'

where

'N d

=
=

Y =

weight of the body


r.p.m. of the drive or

motor shaft

velocity, in feet per

min

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

210

This equation can be used only where the linear speed bears a continuous fixed
A more complex equation
relation to the rotating speed, as a rack driven by a gear.
is necessary for systems involving reciprocating hnear motion obtained by a crank
arm.

method, it is possible to reduce the WR^ of the individual parts of a comThese values of
plex system to an equivalent WR- at the drive or motor shaft speed.
equivalent WR^ may be added directly, and the total equivalent WR^ plus the WR^ of
the driving unit or the motor represents the WR^ of the complete system which the
motor must accelerate or decelerate. All further calculations may be made as though
the system were a simple one of one element of WR' equal to the total equivalent WR-.
To simplify the calculation of the radius of gyration of various mechanical structures, see the tables on pages 17 and 19 to 25.

By

this

DRIVES AND CONTROLS


ANALYSIS OF

211

MOTOR LOAD FOR TORQUE REQUIREMENTS

Starting Torque

Rg

rs

and Time Required

to Start the

Machine

Condition at stoirHng
= Scarfing
A^'S of
torque of
motor
"^^r
.

shaft

^*^r^-m-

P
in.ff:

>:
P

in lbs.

Pp =(/-/o/d/ng torque ofsfatic/oad


on driven macf>.)^ (holding fricfional
To start

torque of machine parts)


mach. Rsrs must be greater than

Pp

fhe excess being available for accelerating


the machine

To

motor torque must overcome all frictional resistances of


bearings, sliding parts, and transmission elements, and also the resistance of any connected load. Where the load is not imposed until the machine has come up to working
However, machines such as compressors, piston
speed, the load resistance is zero.
pumps, and hoists without unloading devices may be required to start under full load.
With machines of these types, the resistance should be determined for the point of
maximum starting torque in the machine cycle.
The motor torque delivered in excess of that required to overcome running friction at start plus starting load on the machine is used in bringing the machine up
start a machine, the

to speed.

Accelerating Torque and

Time Required

to

Bring Machine

Condition when
accelerating

Up

to

Speed

-Linear
acceler-

ation per
sec.

Torque to overcome
frictional forces

Pad. ofaeration
ofmacn. parts
Equivalent mass of ro-

Axis of4.

tating driven mach. parts

motor'
shaft

'

.---Torque to accel-

1^

load on
machine

> erate

Rg r^ = Accelerating torque delivered by motor


To accelerate mach. Rq fc must be greater than
algebraic sum of combined torques resisting
acceleration in machine

The amount

needed to accelerate the machine and the rate at which it


should be dehvered by the motor mil depend upon the moments of inertia of the
masses contained in the moving parts and their radii of gyration about or -Rath reference to the motor axis. Flywheel members added to make the load on the motor
uniform increase the WW- of the machine and, consequently, increase the accelerating
torque which must be dehvered by the motor.
(For a discussion of these factors, see
page 208.) Other factors that determine the torque needed are loads on machine
that must be accelerated before full speed is attained. The time allowed for acceleration is an important factor in determining the heat developed in the motor windings.
of torque

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

212

Running Torque over Time Interval Required by Local Cycles on Machine


Condition

when running

Axis of mofor shaft

Running
forque fo
\ldo work

\\

a flood

t.
Running forque

fomatce

up for fricfional and in


herenfmacfi. losses
Rp

ff =

Running torque of motor


R,- r,. must be greater

To keep mach. running

than algebraic sum of combined resisting


running torques in mach. Limiting value of
Rf r^ h motor pull-out torque

When

operating at rated speed, the torque supplied by the motor

do useful work and to make up

is

that required

machine losses.
In calculating the running torque required to keep the machine operating, it is
desirable to add something on the safe side to take care of unexpected loads and circuit
It is poor practice to plan to use the excess torque that a motor can deliver
variations.
over its nominal rating, because such overloads cause a rise in winding temperature
with consequent depreciation in insulation properties and shortening of motor hfe.

to

Work Load

Clufch /ever -

Mofor

-n

for frictional

and

inlierent

Applied After Motor Is Running

Counfershaff
drive for

machine ^

Time

With a disengaged

clutch or unloading device between motor

conditions at starting favor the motor since

speed against

it is

then free to start

and machine, the


and to come up to

little resistance.

engaged, the machine load imposed on the running motor may be


if the clutch is of the jaw or the magnetic types, or
the load may be apphed to the running motor gradually over a short time range if the
clutch is of the frictional or the spring-separated plate type that permits shpping.

When

clutch

is

applied almost instantaneously

However, the abOity of the running motor to start and accelerate the driven
machine when the clutch is engaged is limited by the torque- value at which the motor
will stall, usually called the break-down or pull-out torque.
If applying the machine load slows the motor, an accelerating torque will be
required of the motor to bring the machine up to the desired speed. Thereafter, the
machine load will determine the running torque required of motor.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS


Work Load
Fan
Moior^

Applied as Motor Speed Increases

*\

213

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

214

SELECTION OF

MOTOR TYPE

Following the analysis of torque requirements and duty cycle of the driven
machine, the next step in the selection of the motor is a matcliing of the torque characteristics of the load with torques that the various types of motors can be expected to

when starting, accelerating, and running.


The torques that mbtors can dehver are dependent upon the type

deliver

of windings

and

the scheme of connections employed in the particular motor; the nature, uniformity,
and magnitude of the voltage at the motor terminals; the capacity of the feed hues;

and the physical conditions surrounding the motor.


Motors are designed primarily to dehver torque at
voltages.

Electrical current

is

specified speeds at definite

supplied commercially as either a direct,

an alternating potential

i.e.,

unidirec-

which the voltage alternates in


Wlien the electrical service is
alternating, a motor must be selected not only to suit the magnitude of the voltage
as with direct current, but also to suit the frequency and the number of phases of
tional potential, or as

in

direction at definite frequencies or cycles per second.

current.

Although the frequency of alternating current as furnished by power companies


is so nearly constant that variations in frequencies can be considered neghgible the
same is not true of voltage. Voltages do vary considerably especially at the end of a
transmission

line.

Variations in voltage are very important considerations in motor performance


because the effective torque output of any motor will vary as the square of the change
Therefore, hne voltages at the motor terminals should be known,
in applied voltage.
and if a variation from rated motor voltage does exist the rated torque should be
interpolated accordingly.
Feed-line capacity should be large enough to take care of the high inrush of cur-

mthout reducing the voltage and thus lowering the effective starting
The motor even though starting under subnormal voltage may be able to
break the static load but have difficultj^ in accelerating the load up to speed; thus
rent at starting

torque.

attendant high current, which tends to


cook the windings and in some types of motors to blow the condenser or burn the

the accelerating time

is

lengthened,

^^ith

commutator.
Effect of Physical Conditions.

Extreme heat surrounding the motor,

i.e.,

high

and
copper in the motor and thus limits the power output of the motor. Insulation wUl
be affected and the life of the motor reduced'if the temperature of the motor windings
rises beyond safe hmits.
Extreme cold around the motor and driven machine may cause the lubricating
mediums to stiffen or harden. Stiff oU in the bearings, pistons, and packings of a
machine will cause hard starting.
Extreme dampness, moisture, or corrosive acid fumes reduces the effectiveness of
ambient temperatures, increases the operating temperature of the active iron

the insulation resulting in current leakage or actual puncture of the insulation.


Special insulations are available for

abnormal conditions.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS


Dirt, either falling or suspended in the atmosphere,

not get into the motor

if

215

and dripping water should

these elements are present, an inclosed type of motor should

be used.

DIRECT-CURRENT MOTORS
nju(>
Series wound
D.C motor

(Wi l
Sr^ /

Shunt wound^
D.C. motor

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

216

Repulsion-start induction-run motors develop a continuous rotating effect on

the rotor because of induced currents in the rotor made continuously effective bycommutation to produce torque during the starting period.
Repulsion-start induction-run motors have high starting and accelerating torques

motor with squirrel-cage rotor, or


These motors at starting are repulsion motors,
its equivalent, are very efficient.
but on reaching a predetermined speed expanding governor weights push a device
under the commutator which short circuits the commutator bars through a common
ring; the same movement releases tension on the brushes with the result that the
armature is short-circuited and is the equivalent of a squirrel-cage rotor in a poly-

and when running

Self starting,

single-phase moTor,
with phase coil cutout

as a single-phase induction

Repulsion start

and

run, single-phase motor

Phase

Capacitor start,
induction run,
single- phase motor

o
o
O

Repulsion start,
induction run,
single-phase motor

j-,

o"o"OTroirv-i

-^

~:^

Capacitor start,
capacitor run,
single-phase

3
Oq

-^O
motorg

Phase dsdz
,^s^-3x
/

V>

|V::

"Jj

-/

O
Fig. 445.

Wiring diagrams

of

winding schemes and starting devices used


horsepower motors.

in typical alternating-current fractional

phase induction motor. When the motor stops, the governor and mechanism return
automatically to their original starting positions.
Repulsion-start induction-run type motors are suited for loads requiring high
Repulsion-start induction-run type motors are
starting and accelerating torques.
furnished only for single speed apphcations.

The spht-phase

motor develops

magnetic rotating effect b}'


spUtting the magnetic field of the stator mnding into two separate windings displaced
One winding is a starting or
in space and having different electrical characteristics.
phase winding, and the other is the main or running winding. When the motor starts,
both windings are on the line. After accelerating up to a predetermined speed, a
governor attached to the rotor acts to open a smtch and cuts out the starting winding.
The motor then continues to operate on the running winding as a single-phase inducstart induction

its

tion motor.

Split-phase motors can be designed with high starting torque but only

by using

They are purposely designed with low starting


relatively high starting current.
torque so that the current and consequently the heating in the starting winding will
be limited.

Equipment driven with spht-phase motors should be easy to start. The inertia
of the load should be small so that the motor can accelerate rapidly to avoid "cooking" the starting winding. Feed mres should have capacity great enough to carry
the high starting current without reducing the voltage at the motor terminals with
consequent reduction of the motor torque.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS

217

Capacitor motors are basically split-phase motors using split magnetic fields in
Improved starting characteristics are obtained by using a capacitor or
condenser in connection with the starting winding. The electrical effect of the condenser increases the angle of the magnetic action to about 90 deg. between the two
windings, approaching a true two-phase effect.
Capacitor-start and induction-run motors employ a centrifugal governor switch
which cuts out both the starting winding and the condenser at a predetermined speed
starting.

after

which the motor operates as a straight single-phase squirrel-cage induction-

type motor.
Capacitor-start induction-run motors wiU dehver starting torques that

are

approximately three and one-half to four and one-half times their full load torque
with locked rotor currents approximately one and three-fourth times repulsion-start
induction-run motor currents. Their operating characteristics when running are
very similar to those of the repulsion start induction run type of motors.
Capacitor-start capacitor-run motors use a capacitor and also a transformer.
The transformer acts to impress a high voltage on the capacitor for starting. Starting torque

is

ing current

three and one-half to four and one-half times full load torque, and start-

is

same

of the

relative order as the capacitor-start induction-run type of

motor.

Capacitor motors can be obtained for both single- and multispeed applications.
Fractional horsepower squirrel-cage induction polyphase motors have a field
made up of polyphase windings and a squirrel-cage rotor made up of conductor bars.

The

starting torque

is

about two and one-half to three times the

full

load torque.

Squirrel-cage induction motors hke direct-current motors wUl usually pull

any load they can

start, i.e.,

the

up

maximum pull-up torque is about equal to the starting

torque, and the rating of the motor should be selected to suit the greater torque as

required

by the

load.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

218

FORM FOR ELECTRIC MOTORS

INQUIRY
1.

Name

2.

Field of use

3.

Estimated quantity,
first year

4.

of

machine to be driveninitial

order
(e)

Power supply:

(/)

(a)

Direct current

(6)

Alternating

_volts.

Will power supply vary?

Motor speed and

8.

_volts

Allowable variation

clockwise

9.

(b)

Give

(c)

(d)

Adjustable speed motor, speed range


10.

Running load requirements and


Load determined by test
tained from present practice

conditions.

(6)

Continuous load

or

(6)

length of time at

(2)

min.
idle running

lb

min., time at

gases

torque

grit

oil

vapor

salt

air

corrosive

explosive

other con-

tamination

in.

(5)

Maximum

temperature of cooling

air

deg. F.

(1)

magnitude

(2)

duration of overloads
frequency of occurrence-

of overloads-

_hp.

12.

_mm.

Bearings and lubrication:


(a) Manufacturer's standard(b)

Motor

to be lubricated at intervals of

Reversing service

min

(2)

time intervals on
min.

(3)

inertia of load

(c)

End

Torque, starting

play restricted

thrust loads

present

i.,off

(d)

Type
(1)

of bearing preferred

Sleeve: lubricated

by

oil

ring

waste

Starting load:
(a)

gas

min.

(1) reversals per,

7.

provisions)

Condition of ventilating air:


of
dust
(a) Presence
steam
moisture

Fluctuating load

(3)

(d)

show ventilation
11.

load

maximum momentary

in-

totally inclosed

rest
(3)

(c)

full

in-

(Give dimensioned sketch of housing and

hp.

(1)

Within machine or housing, partly


closed

hp.

Intermittent load

give following data for each speed)


(a)

below
Foot mounting at end
above
flange mountSpecial (show by sketch)
ingResilient mounting
Is mounting position of the motor
changeable ?

door

(For multispeed motor

estimated

of

Motor housing:
(a) Motor exposure outdoor

ob-

horizontal

length

Motor mounting:

reversible

a multispeed motor required?

maximum

to

oblique

to
6.

Restricted
in.

per cent of

counter clockwise

(e)

of coupling

direct drive-

(a) Vertical

speeds

belt

Type

chain_

I'.p.m.

Direction of rotation, from end opposite


extension,

r.p.m.

gear

Space available for motor


(a) Restricted to a maximum diameter of
(6)

full-load speed

(d) Is

direct

in.

direction of rotation:

Full-load running speed

shaft

Drive:

if

cj^cles

Universal motor_

(c)

the inertia of the load including

wheel ?
Speed of driven element

current

(c)

(b)

is

volts

(d)

(a)

What

couplings, pulleys, gear drives, or fly-

phase,

5.

(d)

-,

accelerating

(2)

lubricated

Ball:

by

oil

or

grease

motor started under load?-

(b)

Is

(c)

without load?
Type of unloading device

or

13.

Shaft extension: single.


_;
.;

if

vertical,

straight

or both ends

up
or tapered

or

down

DRIVES AND CONTROLS


(a)

Diameter

(b)

Pulley fastened by

in.,

length

(b)

in.

setscrew

Key way dimensions standard


:

special,

length
(d)

Can

width

in.

depth

or
in.

16.

in

the design be

made

for standard

shaft dimensions?
14.

Weight limitations

15.

Electrical control:
(a)

Hand
mote_

if

switch used

(c)

Is limit

(d)

Are brakes used

Electrical leads:
(a)

Manufacturer's standard

(b)

Special leads:

(c)

Attachment cord: length.

number

length-

plug

any
17.

Motor protected against overloadunder voltage

key
(c)

219

automatic

re-

Give special requirements such as special


insurance regulations, dynamically balanced,
rotor, quietness of operation, etc.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

220

WINDING CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MULTISPEED MOTORS


MULTISPEED MOTORS, CONSTANT HORSEPOWER, KEY DIAGRAMS

Single winding,

N.E.M.A. MG.
Speed

Low.
High.

two speed

6-41, Fig. 8, 1930

DRIVES AND CONTROLS


TWO WINDING, THREE
N.E.M.A.

SPEED, THREE PHASE, CONSTANT

Bui. 110, p, 612, 1926

Speed

HORSEPOWER

A.S.A. C-6 3.725, 1938


Ti

T,;

221

T,,

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

222

MULTISPEED MOTORS, CONSTANT TORQUE, KEY DIAGRAMS

Single winding, two speed

N.E.M.A.
Speed

MG

6-41, Fig. 7, 1930

DRIVES AND CONTROLS

223

MULTISPEED MOTORS, VARIABLE TORQUE, KEY DIAGRAMS


T4

T4

Single winding,

N.E.M.A.

MG

two speed

Single winding,

6-41, Fig. 4, 1930

Speed

Speed

Low.

Ti, Ti,

High.

Ti, Ti,

Ti open
Tz together

T.

Two

winding, three speed


6-41, Fig. 4, 1930

N.E.M.A.
Speed

Low*.

Second t
High*...

MG

il

two speed

A.S.A. C-6 3.720, 1938

L;

Low.

Ti, Ts, Tc

High.

Ti, Tn,

open

Tz together

224

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN


ELECTRIC CONTROL METHODS

DRIVES AND CONTROLS


Capstan

L| 1-2

225

Lj

Genera for

Capstan

motor
-F/yer motor

Capsfan Speed

A wire-insulating machine requires a constant speed ratio between capstan motor


Fig. 448.
and flyer for starting and running. The capstan motor drives a frequency changer or transmitter
The speed ratio between flyer and
electrically connected to the synchronous motor of the flyer.
capstan is constant at all times.

Cutting
tool

_..

^
Works

--

Platen

y//////////w/y///y/yyyy//y/^wyyy/yyyyy'
'-Limit switches'-'

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

226

Siop /im/fswi^hi
S-f-arf

Speed-

"'-Reversing limH' swiiches''


Fig. 451.

Siop

When milling work having a gap between

machined surfaces, production is increased by rapid


traverse between machining positions. Jump feed
control is accomplished by means of adjustable limit
switches, multispeed motors, and suitable magnetic
controls.

Final posiHon swiich

Slow- down swifch

T
PosiHon

.5

Reverse limif swiich'

Accurate positioning of reversing and stop


Fig. 452.
limits is necessary on tapping machines especially when
tapping blind holes. Special alternating-current reversing motors for tapping service permit as many as 60
The use of two- or four-speed motors
reversals per min.
reduces the number of gear changes required. Accurate
limit switches, quick-acting contactors, and high torque
motors are used. A plug stop is used for braking at the
"out" position.

T Rapid

traverse

.J

-Slow speed

Fig. 453.
Accurate location of boring tools for indexing
requires extremely slow speed of work table to prevent overdirect-current motor and
travel when stop limit is reached.
control is used; heavy armature series resistance and armature
parallel resistance provide for creep speeds for final positioning.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS


E= Voltage
av= Average

RecHfier-^

R.M.5= /?ooj'

51

Load

I
o
o
o
o

AC.
supply

227

mean square

Eav = 0.450 E RMS

CA)

'iRecti'fiers

|4'

-l

Load

-RMJ

/\

fB)

0.450 Ek

/\

\j \J \j \J
Eav=0.9ERMS

Single-phase

{A) Halfrectifier circuits generally used.


used in radio, also in industrial equipment such as
(B)
vibrating machinery or electric razors, requiring reciprocating motion.
(C)
Full-wave rectifier circuit used in radio work and magnetic chucks.
Full-wave rectifier circuit used in industrial applications to obtain directFig. 454.

wave

rectifier circuit

current from alternating-current source.

Load

Load

Fig. 455.

Other

rectifier circuits.

{A) Single-phase voltage-doubler rectifier

to obtain higher than line voltage without transformer.


(B) A three-phase full-wave rectifier circuit, one type of rectifier used to obtain
a large amount of direct-current power for power circuit.
circuit

used

in radio

work

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

228

^-~ Pushbuffon

PushbuHon ~^

for
1

.1

AX.

Fig. 456.

the use of a

Illustrating the use of rectifiers in conjunction with

rectifier in

magnetic control equipment on relays.

Through

conjunction with direct-current relay, multiple control can be obtained over a single-control

circuit.

^--J

Showing the use of a pulsating direct current on a vibrating machine. In most instances, frequency of
Fig. 457.
pulsations is important and on hammer shown 25-cycle alternating current is used with a single-wave rectifier.

Pump

Time

motor

delay

Wheel
motor

control

relay

control

Start-s+op
pushbuttons

Grinding wheet
driven by motor

Pump
motor

-A^

^'^^{[^Pump

Large grinders use pumps driven by separate motors. Pump motor need not be in operation when
Fig. 458.
grinding wheel is not running, but it is sometimes desirable to allow wheel motor to coast to rest before shutting down
pump motor. This can be done electricallj' by means of time delay relay to permit pump motor to operate for predetermined time after wheel motor is shut down. For the starting sequence, an arrangement similar to that in Fig.
462 may be used.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS


Reversing
coni roller

Mofor,

229

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

230

TABLE FOR SEQUENCE


OF OPERATIONS
Press start button

Pump motor starter

Pressure switch closes

closes

Pressure
switch

4 Spindle motor starter closes


Press feed start button

5
6

Feed motor starter closes

Stop button stops

Feed stop stops feed motor

all

motors

Spindle

moior
starter

Sfop

Feed

buri-on

stop

motor

Feed
starter

Feed
start

Feed

motor

Fig. 462.
Electrical interlocking or sequencing of motors for large milling machine ensures that coolant pump
motor is running and pressure obtained before spindle motor starts and that spindle motor is running before feed motor
can be started. A master "stop" button dominates all controls.

Limit switch
No. I -

Limit switct?
No. 2

Fig. 463.
Combination mechanical and electrical torque or load limiting device for control of motor-operated
valves, chucks, and clamps.
When load becomes sufficiently high to stall wormwheel, the worm sliding on a splined
shaft moves axially, similarly to a screw threading through a nut.
This movement compresses a calibrated torque
spring and opens a limit switch, thereby shutting oif the motor.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS

231

ELECTRICALLY OPERATED VALVES


-o/ o-

Power
lines

Floal,
Corrfrol swiVch

C
Supply
Fig.

464.

Straight-way

monly connected

swilch

Power
lines

Tank

supply

Ex.hausi

solenoid valve as eoin-

for simple fluid control.

Control

switch energizes solenoid, opening valve, and permitting flow to begin.

Fig. 465.

Tank level''

Straight-way

automatically liquid level.


control device for valve.

valve applied to control


Float switch used as pilot

-Pilol
-circuil-

Supply

ExhausI

Power
lines

li

Delivery

First Condi+ion

Wafer

A-open, B-closed

Two

straight-way valves, A normally


normally closed, provide two-way fluid
control.
Energizing the solenoids cuts off supply
and vents delivery through exhaust.
Fig. 466.

open and

Fig. 467.
Two straight- way valves offer means of
automatically controlling cycle of processing machine,
such as plastic molding press, having heating and

cooling coils.

Pilol
circuil

Compressor

Pump
Mofor lines

Fig. 468.
Single straight-way valve can be connected across one phase of motor winding to start
flow of cooling water to compressor whenever motor
starts.

Oil supply

mA

Furnace

Straight-way valve of trip type interFig. 469.


locked with oil-furnace control system to cut off oil
supply upon loss of current to motor-driven pump or
to atomizing equipment, or upon occurrence of low
water, low stack temperature, or similar conditions.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

232

Piloi-

arcu/^

J fxhausi-

Supply

i- Delivery

DRIVES AND CONTROLS

233
Pilof

Piloi
circuii-

Supply

Supply

circuit

Delivery
No.2

Jr-'-De/ivery No.1

Fig. 473.

Three-way

Second Condi+ion
First Condition
valve applied as convenient means of transferring one supply to either of two

Pilot

Piloi
circuit

circuit

Operating
'

deliverie.s.

J-

rod

rt

Operating

rod

Exhausi
Operating
cylinder

Operating
cylinder

Supply

Second Condition

First Condi+ion

Fig. 474

Four-way valve arranged to control double-acting cylinder.

Upon

energization of solenoid, operating rod

of cylinder reverses direction.

Exhaust

Power

Power

lines

lines

Float
switch

Float
switch

~~
First

Fig.

Pressure -operated valve

Second Condition

Condition

475. Four-way valve arrangement, employing


level

'

through

Emergency
supply

in Fig. 474, provides automatic control of


'
pressure-operated valve.

principle

shown

tank

"
Delivery

Normal
supply

Normal Condition
Fig.

transferring either of
utilizing inversion of principle shown in Fig. 473, offers means of
Useful in appUcations where an emergency supply is provided.
supplies to a common delivery.

476. Three-way valve,

two

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

234

AUTOMATIC TIMERS

^^1

^Magnef

^D
-

Make and break

Weighl-

confacfs

i^

Pivoi

Adjusfable

'Trip

venf

V^')

y//////////Av///////////.

Weighl

^^ Spring

or
solenoid

2)

Fixed

Clearance

end

gap
>i

IK

Adjustable
veni

yTo con lad


I h rough
spring or
solenoid

Make and
break
conlacis

,'Fluid

Simplest form consists of a


Fig. 477.- -Dashpot principle.
Adjustable
piston or plunger operating in oil, mercury, or air.
small orifices or bleeders provide time adjustment. A by-pass
may be provided near the end of the piston travel for snap
Widely used because of its
action closing of the contact.
When air is used, changing clearances
simplicity and low cost.
caused by dust, gumming of lubricant, and leakage affect the
timing.
If oil is used, the temperature will change oil viscosity
and affect the timing. Also subject to error because of clear-

Inertia

mechanism.
by virtue of the inertia
of two weights mounted on a pivoted
arm and the length of arc to be travFig.

478.

Time delay

is

before mechanical contact is


Tilted by gravity, this device
gives a relatively short interval and
becomes clumsy for long time intervals
ersed

made.

ance changes from wear.

^Moin air line fr

^Valve

Fig. 479.
Contactor works on back pressure from the main cylinder on the welder, pressure being assured
between the welding points before the welding contactor closes. When the back pressure has built up to a predetermined value, the plunger moves upward at a definite rate of speed and the hardened cam closes the mam contacts.
After a predetermined time, the cam moves by the roller that it engages and the main contacts open. One adjustment
the
sets the back pressure at which the contactor plunger starts to move and therefore determines the lag in applymg
current after pressure has been applied.
A second adjustment changes the needle valve opening to the contactor air
This determines the welding time. A third adjustment varies the time of the
cylinder and thus times the upstroke.
downstroke and is of importance only when used with a repeater.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS


,

Copper block
I

Bimei-allic slrip

li^gtegiJ

^,'

Make and
break
coniach

Copper Jackel or ring or


shorl circuiled furns

^^-/Heal barriers

conlacis

'

iir^

m \smm^

U"'; Bimelalllc
^I^jf ^^'''P^

Make and break

Thermal

Moke and break

ff

Copper block

conlacis

Inexpensive time delay


around a bimetallic
strip.
Least accurate device. Has a slow make and break
action.
For longer time intervals, a copper block may be
mounted to absorb some of the heat; the larger the block of
Time intervals
copper, the longer the time interval.
ranging fromi J^ sec. to 5 to 10 min. are possible with this
Fig. 480.

235

relays.

utilizing the effect of a heating coil

de\ace.

Fig. 481.
Magnetic time delay, used on direct
current only.
Relatively inexpensive,
effects
time delays up to 10 sec. by means of residual

Magnet may be copper jacketed,


copper rings, or may have short-circuited turns around the magnet.
Variation in
the amount of copper or in the resistance of shortcircuited turns will affect the time delay.
magnetism.

may have

Moke and break


con tads

\y Solenoid

Eleclro
Fig.

482.

magnel'

Magnetic-drag

time

delay.

small electromagnet is used, and the


motion of the relay plunger is made to
revolve a metal disk in the field of the magnet.
The rotation of the disk is retarded by
magnetic induction. Reliable device, trouble free, but relatively expensive.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

236

Relay

>
WWt

Relay

l_.
1

- +

Fig. 483.
Vacuum tube. Condenser charged or discharged through a resistor closes a relay after definite time,
using direct current. When switch is open, the condenser discharges slowly through shunt resistor. This lowers the
negative potential on the grid, and at the critical value the plate current will rise enough to operate the relay. Full
line voltage may be applied to the condenser to obtain longer time delay.

Fig. 484.

In this circuit, operation is maintained for a predetermined time after the starting impulse has stopped.
the button has been pressed, the filament gets current in series with relay winding 1, and the relay pulls up,
locking in the circuit.
The second contact charges the condenser negative, and no plate current flows. When button
is released, the relay stays closed until condenser discharges.
Then the plate current flows through the second relay
winding in opposition to the first, releasing the armature. Applicable to direct current or rectified alternating current

When

only.

Reciifier

Relay

Re sis lor,

y^

Condenser

PolenHomef'er
^

Transformer
Swiich

Fig. 485.
In the Wes'tinghouse electronic relay, there is no temperature error, reset is instantaneous, adjustment
When the switch is closed, the tube passes current. As the current increases, the increasis easy, and first cost is low.
The IR drop across the resistor
ing IR drop from the potentiometer causes a charging current through condenser.
because of this current applies the negative bias to the grid. Plate current cannot build up very rapidly, because the
After a time period, adjustable through potentiometer, the
faster it increases, the more negative the grid becomes.
plate current will operate relay.
The time delay is proportional to the product of resistance and capacitance. Long
Maximum time delay with this device
delays require large resistors, and short delays correspondingly small resistors.
is about 3 min.
About 0.05 see. is the minimum.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS

237

TRIGGER SWITCH MOUNTINGS

Switch- Posi+ion
ndicafor

Top View with


Cover

Removed

Trigger-operated

ratchet-type single-pole switch, a design no longer in general use. An arrow


stamped on the end of the shaft shows through a hole in the cover plate to indicate the position of the switch. Spring
blades pressing on the faces of the square contact block give a snap action and hold the block in position.
Fig. 486.

Snap lever

spring^

Snap lever fo give


quick break action/

,Slalionary

/ confach

Ralchel operoled

Pawl

Pawl ptvoled on

'

drum

trigger

spring
Fig. 487.

"on"

is

Ratchet-type switch with double pole

for three phase.

Can

stamped on diametrically opposite points on the ratchet wheel.

shows through a hole

in the cover plate.

the switch, a definite

movement

also

A spring lever snaps into the star wheel,

of the trigger

is

required.

be used for single phase.

With switch

in

"on"

The word
word
To open

position, the

giving quick snap action.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

238

- -

Snap

lever

Compress/on spring
i

On position of trigger

Fig. 488.

A design of switch similar to that shown

opening when the trigger is released.


eompression spring opens the switch.

It is

shown here

in Fig.

in the

486 except that

"on"

position.

it is

a two-pole design and

As soon as the

trigger

is

is self-

released, the

Toggle type releasing switch handle. Used on


old style d.c. reamers, toggle device tor ^

quick

make and break

Fig. 489.
A toggle-type self-opening switch used on old-style direct-current reamers. The tripper is pushed
forward until the line of pull of the spring passes the dead center of the link to which it is attached. The spring then
pulls the switch closed.
Upon releasing the trigger, the mechanism returns to the position shown, the switch snapping
open when the toggle spring passes dead center.

Fig. 490.
A conventional-type switch of old design that is self-opening when the trigger is released but can be
held in the closed position by means of a looking pin.
Common to all the switches shown in this group of designs, it is
not dustproof.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS

239

le achbn
maies quick
make and

break

Round confaci- causes


rapid increase in arcing
disi-once

and quick

break of arc

A special design of built-up switch of the self-opening type and provided with a locking pin, similar to
Fig. 491.
Common to all the designs shown here, the switch is now obsolete in favor of fully enclosed
that shown in Fig. 489.
and easily replaceable switch units.

Fig. 492.
Fig. 493.
Fig. 492.
A modern-type commercial switch mounted in a side handle. Such switches are readily replaced as a
The switch opens as soon as the trigger is released unless
unit, inexpensive, and sealed against the entrance of dirt.
the locking pin is set, in which case a slight pull on the trigger releases the locking pin and opens the switch.
Another example of a modern commercial switch mounted as a unit in a grip-type end handle.
Fig. 493.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

240

Fig. 494.

Fic_ 495

494. a rocker-type switch such as used on polishers and portable sanders.


now being replaced by plunger-operated dusttight switches such as shown in Fig. 498.
Fig.

It is

not self-releasing and

Fig. 495.
Another style of mounting a commercial-type switch in a side handle. The switch
unit and is self-opening, as soon as the trigger is released; the return spring being shown dotted.

is

is

replaceable as a

Fig. 496.
In this switch mounting, the trigger actuates the switch by means of a lift rod attached to the back
of the trigger.
A tension spring attached to the upper end of the lift rod and anchored to the lower end of the switch
plate pulls the switch open as soon as the trigger is released.
If the locking pin is depressed when the trigger is pulled

back,
is

it passes through the hole in the trigger which then cannot return to the open position.
pressed, the locking pin is released, snaps back, and releases the trigger.

As soon

as the trigger

DRIVES AND CONTROLS

Fig. 497.

The slider
slider-operated switch.
forth as indicated in the drawing.
not provided with any release arrange-

moves back and

This switch is
ment. It is used only on light model tools where no
damage would be done if the tool were laid down
with the power still on.

241

Fig. 498.
Latest type switch handle for polishers,
Sanders, and portable grinders.
The switch is in a dusttight chamber and is operated by a plunger instead of a
trigger which eliminates the necessity of an opening such
The
as is required when triggers or rockers are used.

plunger makes a close fit. Switch is not self-releasing, it


being necessary to push the plunger for both on and off
positions.

is

Latest design of switch arrangement

The toggle-operated switch


for small die grinders and sanders.
compartment and a dust seal is provided where the toggle comes through the case.
switch does not have a release arrangement that opens it automatically.

Fig. 499.

unit

mounted

This type of

in a dusttight

This switch is of the same type as shown in Fig. 495. It is mounted in a longer handle, being actuated
trigger arrangement.
It is provided with an additional return spring for quick action and also has a
locking pin for holding the switch in the closed position when the trigger is released. A slight pull on the trigger
releases the locking pin and opens the switch.
Fig. 500.

by a remote

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

242

THERMOSTATIC MECHANISMS
Sensitivity or change in deflection for a given temperature change depends

upon

the combination of metals selected as well as the dimensions of the bimetal element.
Sensitivity increases with the square of the length and inversely with the thickness.

The

force developed for a given temperature change also depends

on the type

of

bimetal, whereas the allowable working load for the thermostatic strip increases with
the width and the square of the thickness. Thus, the design of bimetal elements

depends upon the relative importance


Bi'mefa/ helix
I

of sensitivity

and working

load.

Pen arm
Bimetal

In the Taylor recording thermometer, a pen is moved vertically


Fig. 501.
To obtain sensiacross a revolving chart by a brass-invar bimetal element.
tivity, the long movement of the pen requires a long strip of bimetal, which is
For accuracy, a relatively large cross section
coiled into a helix to save space.
gives stiffness, although the large thickness requires increased length to obtain
the desired sensitivity.

Heating

Coniacf
r of a led
by bi-

metal

coil ^

'

Heal

barrier

spring

In

Westinghouse overload relay for large motors, a portion


passed through a heating coil within the relay. Heat
from the coil raises the temperature of a bimetal spiral which rotates a shaft
To withstand the operating temperature, a
carrying an electrical contact.
heat-resistant bimetal is used, coiled into the spiral form for compactness.
Because of the large deflection needed, the spiral is long and thin, whereas the
width is made large to provide the required contact pressure.
By the use of heat barriers between the bimetal spiral and the heating coil,
temperature rise of the bimetal can be made to follow closely the increase in
temperature within the motor. Thus, momentary overloads do not cause
sufficient heating to close the contacts, whereas a continued overload will in
time cause the bimetal to rotate the contact arm around to the adjustable
Fig. 503.

of the

this

motor current

is

stationary contact, causing a relay to shut

down

Room temperaFig. 502.


tures in summer as well as
winter are controlled over a
wide range by a single largediameter coil of brass-invar in

the motor.

thermometer. To
the Friez
prevent chattering, a small

permanent magnet
on each side

is

mounted

of the steel contact

The magnetic attracblade.


tion on the blade, increasing
inversely with the square of the
distance from the magnet, gives
a snap action to the contacts.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS

243

Insulaled healer

winding

/Intake manifold

/load

Conlacis close when bimelal is healed


Fig. 505
Aclive bimelal sirip
healed by eieclric curreni,

iHeol barriers/

.1^.

^.^

"lemperolure compensalingV^
&3i

strip
(

-|

EC-d

r'

c-r-3

Fig. 506.

Fig. 504.

On the Dodge carburetor, when the engine

"hot spot " is held


open by a bimetal spring against the force of a small counterweight. When the thermostatic spiral is heated by the outSince
side air or by the warm air stream from the radiator, the spring coils up and allows the weight to close the vane.
high accuracy is not needed, a thin, flexible cross section is used with a long length to give the desired sensitivity.
Fig. 505.
In the Friez relay, a constant current through an electrical heating coil around a straight bimetal strip
Since the temperature range is relatively large, high sensitivity is not necessary, hence a
gives a time-delay action.
Because of the relatively heavy thickness used, the strip is sufficiently stiff
short straight strip of bimetal is suitable.
to close the contact firmly without chattering.
Fig. 506.
A similar type of bimetal element is used in the Ward Leonard time-delay relay for mercury-vapor
This relay closes the potential circuit to the mercury tube only after the filament has had time to reach its
rectifiers.
normal operating temperature. To eliminate the effect of changes in room temperature on the length of the contact
gap, and therefore the time interval, the stationary contact is carried by a second bimetal strip similar to the heated
element.
Barriers of laminated plastic on both sides of the active bimetal strip shield the compensating strip and
prevent air currents from affecting the heating rate. The relatively high temperature range allows the use of a
straight thick strip, whereas the addition of the compensating strip makes accurate timing possible with a short travel.
Fig. 504.

is

cold, a

vane

in the e.xhaust passage to the

diaphragm
Grounded conlaci
pioved by diaphragm

'Oil pressure

Bimelal

Receiver on

^^^^^

dash

Sender
Fig. 507.
Fig. 508.
Oil pressure, engine temperature, or gasoline level are indicated electrically on automobile dashboard
instruments built by King-Seeley in which a bimetal element is used in both the sender and receiver.
grounded con-

Fig. 507.

tact at the sender completes an electric circuit through heaters around two similar bimetal strips.
Since the same current flows around the two bimetal elements, their deflections are the same.
But the sender element when heated will

bend away from the grounded contact until the circuit is broken. Upon cooling, the bimetal again makes contact and
the cycle continues, allowing the bimetal to follow the movement of the grounded contact. For the oil-pressure gage,
the grounded contact is attached to a diaphragm; for the temperature indicator, the contact is carried by another
thermostatic bimetal strip; in the gasoline-level device, the contact is shifted by a cam on a shaft rotated by a float.
Deflections of the receiving bimetal are amplified through a linkage that operates a pointer over the scale of the
receiving instrument.
Since only small deflections are needed, the bimetal element is in the form of a short stiff strip.
Fig. 508.
Oil dashpots used in heavy-capacity Toledo scales have a thermostatic control to compensate for changes
in oil viscosity with temperature.
A rectangular orifice in the plunger is covered by a swaged projection on the bimetal
element.
With a decrease in oil temperature, the oil viscosity increases, tending to increase the damping effect but the
bimetal deflects upward, enlarging the orifice enough to keep the damping force constant. A wide bimetal strip is used
for stiffness so that the orifice will not be altered by the force of the flowing oil.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

244
Helical

expansion
iube -

/Bimelol

compensallng
lever

isss\ssy

Valve closed

of l40deg.F
Full open of
ISOdeg.F

Fig. 509.
In mercury-filled indicating thermometers,
expansion of the mercury in a bulb at the end of a
capillary line causes the spiral tube in the gage to uncoil,
the dial pointer being moved by means of a linkage.
However, changes va the temperature of the mercury
in the capillary and spiral also affect the movement of the
In the
linkage introducing an error in the reading.
Taylor indicating thermometer, compensation for changes
in gage temperature is obtained by a flat bimetal strip
that forms a part of the pointer linkage. The strip is
designed so that its deflections are equal but opposite
to the effect caused by changes in gage temperature.
Since little load is imposed on the thermostatic strip, the
compensating action can be obtained with high accuracy.

Fig. 510.
In cooling-water thermostats for automobile engines, the water flow imposes a load on the
bimetal spiral, and in addition the overtravel caused
by continued cooling after the valve is closed sets up
stresses that increase as the temperature decreases.
Sufficient strength and cross section to safely withstand these stresses without permanent deformation
requires a long flexible element.
High accuracy is
not obtainable, but in this application a relatively
large variation in operating temperature is permissible.
In the Chase thermostat, the bimetal element
is in the form of a tapered spiral spring v.'hich is connected to a rotating valve by a simple linkage. To
stabilize the bimetal element, it is subjected to a
series of hot and cold treatments at temperatures
beyond the normal temperature range.

Fig. 511.
When the bimetal element in a gas pilot-light control is placed near the pilot flame, the bimetal is
subjected to a temperature near its maximum operating range, and in service over long periods of time the valve may
become corroded and fail to function when an emergency arises. In the pilot control made by the Patrol Valve
Company, operating temperature of the bimetal is reduced and distortion from overheating is prevented by a dual
pilot construction.
The constant-burning pilot ignites a second pilot which heats the bimetal strip when the thermostatic control calls for heat.
The bimetal strip upon heating opens the toggle-operated main burner valve, which, hy
means of a double-seat construction, reduces the supply of gas to the second pilot, just enough flame being left to keep
the bimetal from closing the valve. Since relatively wide limits for temperature of operation are permissible, the
bimetal element is designed to develop sufficient force to operate the toggle spring without the use of high working
stresses.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS

245

Double-ihrow confac^ b/ads/


" - Nickel silver

Confac-/-,

spring

vacuum

check

'

-Nickel silver

valve pin
~

Valve closed

by floaf or
expansion

of bellows
Concave
bi'mei-al disk.

lead
washer

Terminak

Temperolure
adjuslmenl

Bimefal

Coniacfs

strip

VenI regulaling screw


Fig. 514.

Fig. 513.

Fig. 512.

Toggle

obtained in the Spencer disk thermostat. The disk is a


saucer-shaped piece of bimetal sheet which snaps itself from a concave to a convex shape at a predetermined temperature.
Both the amount of movement and the temperature diiferential between opening and closing temperature
depend on the design of the disk. For greater sensitivity, smaller differential and a larger movement than can be
obtained with the plain disk, the bimetal disk is corrugated. Since the disk is small and stores but little heat, it warms
Fig. 612.

action, without separate springs,

is

or cools rapidly.

When used as an electrical control device, insulated silver contacts are mounted on the bimetal disk. In the cold
When
position shown, each of the contacts bridges a gap in insulated plates connected to the heavy terminals.
heated, the disk snaps to a convex shape, the circuit opening through the ^evice at three points.
Fig. 513.
In the Westinghouse thermostat for electric hot-water heaters, a small range of temperature difference
between on and off is needed, and to eliminate the necessity for an intermediate relay, the contacts must break a relaThese conflicting requirements are met by using a double-toggle mechanism. A light toggle
tively heavy current.
spring on the contact blade keeps the contacts firmly seated until the stronger toggle on the bimetal strip comes into

operation.

The bimetal blade is free to move nearly to the dead-center position, thereby storing energy in its toggle spring
Energy released by the toggle spring, when the bimetal blade
before any pressure is applied to the contact blade.
passes dead center, delivers an impact to the contact blade, breaking loose any slight welding that may have occurred
during the previous operation. This thermostat is used as a current-limiting switch, disconnecting one heater as
another is connected. Because of the double-toggle design, the thermostat contacts will safely interrupt 5 kw. at
220 volts alternating current with a temperature differential of 5F. or less.
Fig. 514.
In radiator air valves made by the Anderson Manufacturing Company, air forced into the valve
When steam reaches the valve, the heat increases the vapor
passes around a small bellows partly filled with a liquid.
pressure within the bellows, and the resultant expansion raises the float, thereby closing the air-vent orifice.

Adjusfing screw

W////yyyyy////A

Fig. 515.

Electric irons require a convenient adjustment for the temperature at which the bimetal element opens

the circuit. In the mechanism designed by Proctor & Schwartz, a double lever not only permits adjustment of the
operating temperature, but also relieves the bimetal strip of anj' restriction when it cools to room temperature. Since
the operating temperature range is high, a heat-resisting bimetal material is used in the form of a short stiff strip. Current is conducted to the bimetal contact through a flexible silver ribbon eliminating the effect of heat caused by current
passing through the bimetal strip.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

246

Pressure
connection

Pressure
bellows.

/Vapor

Rubber
diaphragm

filled bellpns

-Bellows
spring

Valve
disk

Spring
action

Walerinkf

screw

Fig. 516.
Automobile cooling water temperature
is controlled by a self-contained bellows in the thermostat made by the Bridgeport Brass Company.
As
in the radiator air valve, the bellows itself is subjected
to the temperature to be controlled.
As the temperature of the water increases to about 140F., the
valve starts to open; at approximately 180F., free
flow is permitted.
At intermediate temperatures, the
valve opening is in proportion to the temperature.

-'' _ *^Q]

Fig. 517.
In a throttling type of circulating water
control valve made by C. J. Tagliabue Manufacturing
Company for use in refrigeration plants, the valve
opening varies with the pressure on the bellows. This
valve controls the rate of flow of the cooling water
through the condenser, a greater amount of water
being required when the temperature, and therefore
the pressure, increases. The pressure in the condenser is transmitted through a pipe to the valve
bellows thereby adjusting the flow of cooling water.

The bronze bellows is protected from contact with


the water by a rubber diaphragm.

Liquid outside of
/ Pressure spring
belJows
,'
adjusted by dial
^Capillary tube

Bimetalblade

Bellows

housing
Bimefai '
rocker

Pilot light

va/ve

Throttling '
valve

gas

Fig. 518.

An

^^

automatic gas-range control made

by the Wilcolator Company has a

sealed thermostatic
element consisting of a bulb, capillary tube, and
As food is often placed near the bulb, a
bellows.
nontoxic liquid, chlorinated diphenyl, is used in the
The liquid is also nonliquid expansion system.
inflammable and has no corrosive effect upon the
phosphor bronze bellows. By placing the liquid
outside instead of inside the beUovvs, the working
stresses are

maximum

at normal temperatures

when

At elevated working
the bellows bottoms on the cup.
temperatures, the expansion of the liquid compresses
the bellows against the action of the extended spring
Changes in
which, in turn, is adjusted by the knob.
calibration caused by variations in ambient temperature are compensated by making the rocker arm of
bimetal suitable for high-temperature service.

~Double

break

contacts

Fig. 519.
For electric ranges, the Wilcolator
thermostat has the same bellows unit as is used on the

But, instead of a throttling action,


gas-type control.
the thermostat opens and closes the electrical contacts
with a snap action. To obtain sufficient force for the
snap action, the control requires a temperature
For a
difference between "on" and "off" positions.
control range frora room temperature to 550F., the
differential in this device is plus or minus 10F.; with
a smaller control range, the differential is proportionately less.
The snap-action switch is made of
beryllium copper, giving high strength, better snap
action, and longer life than obtainable with phosphor
bronze, and because of its corrosion resistance the
beryUium-copper blade requires no protective finish.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS

247

Permanent
magnef
'S+eel Blade
^Auxr/j'ary

Silver

confacis
Silver

conlacis

Foggle spring^

conlacfs

'Bellows spring
''

0-

Ternperalure

ad/usfmenl-

Dlfferenh'al

'

adjuslmeni

Ternperalure

Ad/usling screw

adjuslmeni

Fig. 521.

Fig. 520.

For

Fig. 622.

heavy-duty room-temperature controls, the Perm thermostat uses a bellows mechanism that
develops a high force with small changes in temperature. The bellows is partly filled with liquid butane, which at
room temperatures is a gas having a large change in vapor pressure for small temperature differentials. Snap action
of the electrical contact is obtained from a small permanent magnet that pulls the steel contact blade into firm contact
when the bellows cools. Because of the firm contact, the device is rated at 20 amp. for noninductive loads. To avoid
chattering or bounce under tlie impact delivered by the rapid magnetic closing action, small auxiliary contacts are
With the large force developed by the bellows, a temperature differential of only 2F.
carried on light spring blades.
Fig. 520.

obtained.
Fig. 521.
Snap action in the Tagliabue refrigerator control is obtained from a bowed flat spring. The silver
contacts carried on an extended end of the spring open or close rapidly when movement of the bellows actuates the
spring.
With this snap action, the contacts can control an alternating-current motor as large as IK hp. without the
use of auxiliary relays. Temperature differential is adjusted by changing the spacing between two collars on the bellows shaft passing through the contact spring. For temperatures used in freezing ice, the bellows system is partly
is

with butane.
In the General Electric refrigerator control, the necessary snap action is obtained from a toggle spring
supported from a long arm moved by the bellows. With this type of toggle action, the contact pressure is a maximum
at the instant the contacts start to open.
Thermostatic action is obtained from a vapor-filled system using sulphur
dioxide for usual refrigerating service or methyl chloride where lower temperatures are required.
To reduce friction,
the bellows makes point contact with the bellows cup. Operating temperature is adjusted by changing the initial
compression in the bellows spring. For resistance to corrosion, levers and blades are stainless steel with bronze pin
filled

Fig. 522.

bearings.

Flexible bellows
seal,

'

Thermosl-a-fTc

bellows spring
Capillary

lube.

Needle
valve

Bellows
spring
adj'usrmen/

Fig. 523.

Two bellows units are used

Fodders thermostatic expansion valve for controlling large refrigeration systems.


A removable power bellows unit is operated bj' vapor pressure in a bulb attached to the evaporator
output line. The second bellows serves as a flexible, gastight seal for the gas valve. A stainless steel spring holds
the valve, closed until opened by pressure transmitted from the thermostatic bellows through a molded push pin.
in the

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

248

AUTOMATIC STOPS
Thread or
wire

SpooU^

Spool^
'

Tension spring

Idler
-4

Idler carrier

Sh'rrup swivels on
point so ffiaf ii

i'iiis

cannoi reengage

'^

cronl<
Osciiiat/nq

shaft
Angle of con-

Stationary'

tinuous oscillation

To clutch ~,

Feelers"

Thread-'

Fig. 524.
A mechanism used on the Barberspooler.
When the thread breaks, the
feelers are released and the spiral spring causes
the spindle with finger to rotate. The latter
throws the stirrup into the path of the oscillating crank, which on its downward stroke
throws the spool into the position shown dotted,
the stirrup then being thrown out of the path
of the oscillating crank.

Colman

Fig. 525.
Mechanism used with variations on tubular
braiding machines.
When braiding, tension on the wire or
thread lifts the idler carrier which thereby releases the pawl
from the ratchet on spool flange and allows the spool to turn
and unwind. When the machine stops, the tension on wire is
decreased, allowing the idler carrier to fall so that the pawl can
engage the ratchet. If the wire breaks while the machine is
running, the unsupported idler carrier falls to the base of the
standard, and when the standard arrives at the station in the
raceway adjacent to the cam C, the lug h on idler carrier
strikes the cam C, rotating it far enough to disengage a clutch
on the driving shaft, thereby stopping the machine.

Crankshaft
Unsealed
Continuously

rotating
eccen trie

,
>

packages,!

^^/

'Eccentric arm oscillates


con tinuously about the
fixed center

Recip rocafing
bar,

Siop^

WW//////M/////.

~~ Floating center in
guide block that

Fixed

Thread
tension

rides in slot

center

Fig. 526.
When the thread breaks, the stop drops and
intercepts reciprocating bar.
On the next counterclockwise
oscillation of the eccentric arm, the bar B is raised.
A feature
of this design is that it permits the arm B to move up or down
independently for a limited distance.

Ratchet wheel

Arrangement

used on some
package-loading machines to stop the machine
if a package should pass the loading station
without receiving an insert. Pawl finger F has
a rocking motion obtained from crankshaft,
timed so that it enters the unsealed packages
and is stopped against the contents. If the box
is not filled, the finger enters a considerable
distance and the pawl end at the bottom
engages and holds a ratchet wheel on the driving
clutch, which disengages the machine driving
Fig.

shaft.

527.

DRIVES AND CONTROLS


>7r-

Bobbin
shuHle

lis

oscilbfes

the/ay

249

wM

s^:^.

P/vofed,

Mach/ne

iob/e^
_I_

Adjusiable dog
'X-slo-l-i

Clutch and brake


operating sfjafi

^-F/xed
528.

Fig.

Schematic

diagram of mechanism to

cause bobbin changer to operate. If the contact arm


does not sHp on the bobbin, the lever A will rotate
to the position shown.
But if contact with the
bobbin center slips, as it will do if the bobbin is emptj',
lever A will not rotate to the position indicated by
the dashed line, thereby causing the bobbin changer
to

come

Simple type of stop mechanism for hmitFig. 529.


ing the stroke of a reciprocating machine member.
Arrows indicate the direction of movement.

into action.

\\%f'Pour/ng spout
,

Reciprocating

Latch

shaft,

Fastened
to frame

-tiarc/ened
steel stops

Catch

control
shaft

lever

Fig. 530.
In this textile machine, any movement
that will rotate the stop lever counterclockwise will
bring it in the path of the continuously reciprocating
shaft.
This will cause the catch lever to be pushed
counterclockwise and the hardened steel stop on the
clutch control shaft will be freed. A spiral spring
then impels the clutch-control shaft to rotate clockwise, which movement throws out the clutch and
applies the brake.
Initial movement of the stop
lever may be caused by the breaking of a thread, a
moving dog, or any other means.

Fig. 531.
When the predetermined weight of
material has been poured on the pan, the movement
of the scale beam pushes the latch out of engagement,
allowing the paddle wheel to rotate and thus dump
the load. The scale beam drops, thereby returning
the latch to the holding position and stopping the
wheel when the next vane hits the latch.

CHAPTER

VIII

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION

METHODS
Page

Page

Fusion Welding

252

Permanent Mold Casting

Resistance Welding

259

Die-casting

Furnace Brazing
Flame Hardening

264
266
267

Forging
Flame Cutting

Centrifugal Casting

Powdered Metal Pressings

251

267
268
270
275
276

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

252

WELDED CONSTRUCTIONS

BUILT-UP

The details illustrated, taken from designs for sanitary


and chemical processing equipment, represent utUization
of diversified metal-working equipment bending roUs,
power presses, flangers and such ^to fabricate functionComally correct parts from simple sheet and fittings.
mercial shapes are used where practical; but parts are
flame cut, forged, or roUed when such fabrication is more

~Benf and flame


cuf fo size
'

Pipe section

-Sfeel base plate

economical or design requirements dictate.

'

Shell

Angle

Bent

Angle

"

Half coupling flame


cut fo shape

"Pipe section

^'Steel base plate

'Angle

plate

BUILT-UP SUPPORTS

LIGHT TANK SUPPORTS


Shaft-_
Thrust bearing

'Tank shell end

II

ii

l!5/7e//-Hx

Pipe section

-Flame cut fo

Flangedchan
nel not welded

fit

tank shape " Sheared and


bent fo shape

SUPPORT FOR LIGHT-LOADED


LARGE DIAMETER TANKS

to be

Angle
edgewelded

'^Sheared
ribs

to shell

TANK SUPPORT

SHAFT SUPPORT

/Steel base

Shell

Section

Steely 0^
ring ^',\

crimped

>

SIMPLE SUPPORT FOR CIRCULAR


OR SQUARE TANKS

Formed and
^?

Shell--

Angle ^

Shell-

Heavy gage
y
^

U*-Shell

plate

ED6E REINFORCEMENTS

>.y4>^)^'iL^Gasket

'Top

Shell^:

Reinforcing '^Shell

ring

shape

Cover ^

^5SS

sri eared

and bent to

flanged
at top

Shell-

Steel base plate

'^

Dished

bottom

'^Angle

SIMPLE TANK SUPPORT

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS

253

Flame -cut
circle

.^Cylindrical
"^
shell

Eiss

Pipe

v^'Flnnnp

|/

lAluminum washer

secifon,

Tank base,
flame -cut
steel circle

'-Pipe section

/^Rubber gasket

,>>,,!!,. ,!>/>'>lV,

Welded

L/

Tank shell

spud

Aluminum
shell

Aluminum coupling

Drop - forged spud


or forged boiler plate

Shells'

Cylindrical
shell

Pipe

Tank siiell

section,

Cladding metal

Steam

Inlet

Flame-cuf sfeel ring j

mid

^^
Pipe
section

'Erosion

plate

^Pipe

flange
V

/Steam
Outer - *{.
shell

Outlet cast of
cladding material

Extends inside tank

two weld
points tor additional
wall allowing

BUILT-UP INLETS AND OUTLETS

strength

Shafts

<^^

Flame-cut

/Reamed

steel rings

BUILT-UP AGITATORSANITARY PROCESSING

II

^ M

iln

Shaft ~-,^

\wk;

Packing

iyPipe
section

"Pocking

y,' Round iron


bar, threaded

ana reamed
^^

Flame-cut

steel ring

Small diameter
shaft

<~<^ STUFFING BOXES

Jacket

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

254

Dished fop

Flaf iron
ring bolted
to shell

'

Clamping means welded io iron ring


which is bolted to light-gage stiell

Cylindrical shell

PERMANENT
TANK COVER

Cover
J

Rubber.^ plate i

Aluminum
bar
\

gasket (- /'""'
Top i^'"-"
plate
Ola,

Flame -cut circle

Gum-rubber
gasket

/.Rubber
gaskeisf

;i

//

Clamp
VAPOR-TIGHT /

TANK COVER

^^Ligtit-gage

aluminum

^mA

rgi'Ea iTank

solid welded
to flat iron band bolted
to drum

'Sleel clips

Rubber)
gasket

^^d^''

_E

^
SIGHT- GLASS DETAIL

Cylindricai shell

AQ.Z'c^Z

DOOR

Tank-

Tee bolt

shell

end^

"Jv

"

door
frame

.^ Steel

Tee bolt-

SteeI slee

Asbestos

Gasket

gasket

Defail

STEAM-TIGHT DOOR
S^Szzzs
Section A-A

Cover clamps
equally spaced

FOUR-SEGMENT DEMOUNTABLE
TANK COVER

JL.

Steel ring ^

Tack welded
to cover

Inner
I

shell

Outer
shell

Dished

Inner

"-^

shell

"7*

T!r

Outer base .lArKFT'?


'J'^^Ktli,
jacketing

Low-pressure
Jacket

HINGED
COVERS

Tack welded.

Round-iron

Forged

ring-s.

steel ring

Outer
shell -.

Steel
gusset

/Inner
^shell

Inner

',

shell

Pressure

High Pressure

Tank cover

Flame -cuf

shell

Outer^

Moderate

^
^

^;

7.

arm

Heavy forged

steel

steel
Cylindrical^

Steel plafe
welded to tank

shell

andpipe

"Steel

washers

Tack
welded

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS


Flanged and

Flanged and

'

sloffed cover

255

slotted cover

iTin retainer

/Slotted steel

reinforcing
ring

)J

a^ ^

r' Gasket

Gasket
Cylindrical

stie II

~~

;L

'Steel ring

ll

orpin

;^v^

Angle ring,
slotted

''Angle
'gle

shell

i*

ring, slotted
slott

H^
^

^^-' Cylindrical

orpin

'',

"a

^^
Steel
Steel r.
ring

..

shell

Sanitary

-^^

Angle

Gaskef-ing

Cylindrical shell

Construction

Dished top

'^^Szi^^^Dished top

^Z222zs^Dis/7ed top

^^^
A Hoy casting

Forged steel

Forged steel

machined

machined

flanges

{Forged

"^^m
V^mMss.

g^

flanges

ty\

^r^^'

r/hyj

r'

\ \

\\

^ -;

^y.

sT^
^
1^^^^^^
r

yy Clamp ^
Shell

V\

'Gasket

Cylindrical shell

- Cylindrical shell

VARIOUS FORMS OF PRESSURE JOINTS

^
D

^Sfeel

bar
stock

Flanged top

Clamp
'Rein-

Sguare iron ring


shaped and
cut from solid bar
machined to section

forcing

ring

detail,

shown above

Wy
^ Flanged
shell

Flame -cut slots

Clamp'

for hold down


bolts
I

Iron ring, machined

\ Flanged top

Clamp ~.
'

Stainless steel

Rubber gasket
Flame-cut
I

steel ring

Iron ring,

welded to
shell

Pin

Flat
'"-

Cylindrical
shell

Flame:cuf

steel ring

CLAD JOINT

i[on

Cylindrical
shell

HIGH-PRESSURE JOINTS

'^Cylindrical
shell

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

256

WELDING
By

S.A.E. 4340

STEEL

welding, quenching, and tempering after gas welding, S.A.E. 4340 tubes can

be butt-welded to give a tensile strength of more than 180,000 lb. per sq. in. with a
Rockwell hardness of C 46. It is considered that a minimum tensile strength of
125,000 lb. per sq. in. can be safely specified for parts made by gas welding S.A.E.
4340 steel tubes and normahzing.
As shown in the accompanying table, butt-welded specimens of S.A.E. 4340
tubes can be heat-treated to develop a maximum tensile strength of 217,000 lb. per
sq. in. as compared with a maximum tensUe strength of 252,800 lb. per sq. in. for the

unwelded tube. The gas-welding characteristics


ter than those of S.A.E. 4130 steel tubes.
RESULTS OF TENSION TESTS,

BUTT-WELDED 4340 STEEL TUBES


2H in. O.D. X 0.12.5-in. wall
Specimen
No.

Rockwell
Tensile strength,
lb.

per sq. m.

As Welded
1

2
3

4
5

Average

hardness,
(base metal)

of this material are equal to or bet-

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS

257

ARC WELDING THIN SHEETS


Uniformly good arc welds in sheets less than 0.050 in. (18 gage) thick can be
made with generator-type welders with a minimum setting of 10 to 15 amp. with
Stainless steel and Monel exhaust stacks
stable operation at 20 amp. and higher.
comparatively
for
aircraft,
which
are
of
thin gage, are being fabricated
manifolds
and
by this method. Results of tests on two aircraft materials, S.A.E. 1025 and 4130,
are

shown

in the following tables.

RESULTS OF TESTS ON WELDED THIN TUBES


Specimen

HANDBOOK

258

o3

J^

tt

qj

-;

03

-2

OF MECHANICAL DESIGN
i-O

r\

^1
PL,

S^'-"

S"$ <^^ "

CO

o
a!

CO

t-l

CO

<
O
O
(
H

o3

CO

en
p2

H
O
-J!

O
C5
I

a
w
^
o

j3

C
O

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS

259

METALS THAT CAN BE RESISTANCE WELDED

Good weld
Completely unifed
bu+ briHIe weld

Poor weld
No weld
Blank space- Combination
net- tried

the course of spot v/eldi'na


oafed materials, ftie coatings
frequently dissolve In the other
tals presen t or burn away

Courtesy of
" Telephone Record

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

260

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS

261

FOUR SURFACE PREPARATIONS FOR SPOT WELDING ALUMINUM


Method

I.

in 50 per cent HNO3 cold for 15 sec*


Rinse in cold water. *
4 per cent NaF at 160F. for 30
Dip parts in 5 per cent NaOH

Dip parts

1.

2.

3.

5.

Rinse in cold water.


Dip parts in 50 per cent

6.

Rinse in cold water, f

7.

Rinse in boiling water. J


Dry parts on steam coils or in sawdust.

4.

8.

Method

HNO3

cold for 15 to 30 sec. to remove black deposit from step

in 50 per cent
Rinse in cold water. *

HNO3

cold for 15 sec*

3.

Dip parts

NaOH

at 160F. for 30 sec.

Dip parts

in 10 per cent

7.

Rinse in cold water.


in 50 per cent
Rinse in cold water, f
Rinse in boiling water. |

8.

Dry

4.

Dip parts

5.
6.

Method

HNO3

cold for 15 to 30 sec. to

remove black deposit from step

III.

Paint area to be welded with gum tragacanth HF acid paste and leave on for 30
Wash paste off with running cold water or with wet rags.

3.

Dry

off

paste

is

prepared from
3

10
Dissolve

sec.

water with dry rags.

Gum tragacanth

gum

3.

parts on steam coil or in sawdust.

2.

1.

3.

II.

2.

1.

sec.

gum tragacanth in

lb.

gum

gal.

tragacanth

hot water

hot water, add one gallon of alcohol to water

if

necessary to dissolve

tragacanth.

Add

10 lb. hydrofluoric acid to above solution.


Material must be stored in parafHn-lined containers.

Operators must wear rubber gloves and goggles to use this material.

In partially assembled

parts precautions should be taken to keep acid out of joint.

Method

IV.

Area to be spot welded


h.

Rub
Rub

c.

Use

a.

*
t
I

may

be cleaned by mechanical means.

with steel wool.

with

fine

emery

cloth.

fine wire brush.

Omit

steps 1 and 2 for material relatively free from oil.


Repeat steps 3 to 6 for material having very heavy heat-treating film not removed in steps 1 to 6.
Final hot water should be thoroughly free of dissolved salts and of organic matter which would tend to stain the

freshly cleaned parts.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

262

PREPARATION OF MATERIALS FOR RESISTANCE WELDING

Fig. 532.

Fig. 533.

Fig. 534.

Fig. 535.

Round, embossed projections allow the use of electrodes. Several projection welds can be made
simultaneously.
Fig. 533. Pointed or cone-shaped projections are often used on light-gage materials, such as 22 and 24 gage.
Fig. 534. Protruding punch out may help to locate parts preparatory to welding.
Wliere great strength
not
required, the punch out
sometimes electroforged down.
Fig. 535. Prick punch marks made with round punch (one blow) used in welding thick plates to light-gage sheets
Fig. 532.

flat

is

itself is

to

throw up a crater which

localizes

welding heat and pressure.

Fig. 538.

Fig. 537.

Fig. 536.

Fig. 539.

Design of embossed corners, formed over one another and welded between V-shaped
headed part can be projection welded.
or
Almost any form screw,
Slight radius on the end the rod permits to be welded to another part without throwing a
the round projection, resulting
with the heated metal
cavity
Fig. 539. The crater or

electrodes.

Fig. 536.
Fig. 537.
Fig. 538.

of

rivet,

specially

of

it

fin

or

flash.

ringlike

of

is filled

in close

mechanical contact over the whole surface.

Fig. 540.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
necessity

640.
541.
542.
543.

Fig. 543.
Fig. 542.
in order to localize the welding area.

Fig. 541.

A ring projection can be turned or coined on the shaft


Similar to
except reversed.
Projection swaged on the edges a
a method
Specially headed screws or studs prepared both to
Fig. 539,

of using jigs or fixtures.

of

piece,

of

embossing thick plates or strap stock.


weld and to locate the screws without the

localize

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS

263

PREPARATION OF MATERIALS FOR RESISTANCE WELDING


>

Fig. 544.

<

Fig. 546.

Fig. 545.

Fig. 548.
Fig. 547.
Fig. 549.
Elongated projections that cross each other are for the lightest gages and certain nonferrous combinaFig. 544.
tions and where a good strong weld is imperative.
Elongated projections or a pattern of ribs that cross one another gives many points of small welded
Fig. 545.
Should be used for thin sheet metal.
area.
Elongated projection for welding to a curved surface. This assures ample contact surface in the
Fig. 546.
direction in which movement is likely to occur.
Upsetting a tube to form bulges can be done by heating and upsetting on a butt welder.
Fig. 547.
Fig. 548.
Rods of almost any metal can be upset to provide increased sections or limiting rings.
Fig. 549.
Offsetting helps to locate the lap joint and also contributes to having one side smooth.

Fig. 550.

fn

Fig. 552.

Fig. 550.
Fig. 551.
Fig. 552.
blade.

Welding both
a box form simultaneously, by employing a shunt-block device.
An example "pry-bar" welding. Done by prying against parts backed up by
Coined switch contacts having three conical projections that nest a ring groove stamped
sides of

dies.

of

in

M
^

in the

Wire cable ^

Fig. 555.
Fig. 554.
Fig. 553.
Fig. 553.
When wire cables are "cut" by clamping between the jaws of a welder and burning the cable in two,
a globule of metal, formed on the ends, holds the wires together.
Fig. 554.
Pipe or heavy-walled tubes can be butted together or to other pieces. Chamfering the pipe ends
keeps flash at a minimum.
Fig. 555.
Rods or cables can be economically welded into sleeves or ferrules.

264

HANDBOOK

OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

FURNACE BRAZING

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS


DESIGNS OF JOINTS FOR BRAZING
PARTS HELD TOGETHER BY THEIR

OWN

SCREW

WEIGHT

FASTENING

-<ZZ>i
I

LocaHng ^

Copper

washer

^Hole for

Brazing

locoHng

Brazing
wire

STAKED
i^Z

^iCoppen^

/Brazing

Copper

y wire

Nofe square corners io obiain

a consfanf minimum clearance

Brazing
'

wire

^^^

between al/portions of surfaces


to be brazed

METHOD FOR KEEPING


CORNERS CLEAN OF

FLAN6ED JOINTS

KNURLED

BRAZING MATERIAL

^Chamfer

Brazing
wire

Brazing

SWAGED
Riveted or screw fastening

iBrazing
wire

^ wm

W^

tube, spot

welding or

COUNTERSUNK
r

Hold by ex-

panding

-<^

Brazing
wire

m
^

EX PANDED TUBE

zzzz^k

pinning

RIVET

.Brazing
'

wire

mzzzzzA

CRIMPED ASSEMBLY
~ Brazing
wire

265

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

266

FLAME HARDENING DATA


900

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS

26/

CASTING DATA
Centrifugal Casting

Materials Suitable.

Alumininn, bronze, Monel, beryllium copper,

iron, steels of

steel, copper, and other nonferrous materials.


Shapes. Any combinations of cylindrical shapes such as wheels, gears, screwdown nuts, bushings with tapers, and parts with varying diameters.
Maximum Size. Screw-down nuts, weighing approximately 3,600 lb. each, for a

various grades, stainless

new continuous-type

steel mill,

have been centrifugally

cast.

Finish Allowances.
Inside diameter

Outside diameter
Outside diameter,

in.

allowance,

allowance,

in.

in.

2 or less
2

4K.

4K-6.
6

-10.

Over 10

Ford casting

of

both bevel and cluster gear blanks allows only

.I32

to

He

in.

stock

for machining.

Practical minimum about H


smaU quantities
Cost. More costly

Wall Thickness,

in.

than sand castings in small


However, as quantity increases to 20 or more, the cost is little if any more
quantities.
because of the material required for extra gates and risers in sand castings. CentrifGenerally
ugal mold cost is only about 15 per cent that of a comparable forging die.
justified
as few as
can
by
centrifugal
casting
be
the cost of a permanent metal die for
10 or 12 pieces, although customarily such a die is not made for fewer than 25 or.
Relative

in

30 pieces.
Typical Examples.

The

bushings for Hamilton Standard propellers were forcopper


with scrap running as high as 30 per cent. Permamerly sand cast of beryllium
nent mold castings did not prove feasible. Scrap has been almost eliminated by use
of aluminum bronze centrifugal castings of tapered hollow bushings.
In another case, several hundred bronze rings, about 45 in. outside diameter, and
20 in. inside diameter and 3 in. thick, originally specified as forgings were found to

have satisfactory physical properties when centrifugally cast. Die costs would have
been high for the comparatively few forgings required. Another gain was less time
required to get delivery.

Permanent Mold Casting


Size limitations:

Largest permanent mold casting produced, 20


100

16

Smallest permanent mold casting produced weighed

Minimum
Up to 5
Over

34

weighing more than

in.,

lb.

less

than

oz.

tolerance, all dimensions:

+0.010

in

5 in

Add 0.001

in.

per

in. of

in.

length

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

268

Undercuts:
Omit wherever possible, but, if unavoidable, they can be produced through use of
collapsible metal core or, if that is impractical, by use of baked sand core.

minimum
minimum diameter
minimum

Section thickness,

Cored

holes,

Draft angle,

085 in.
25 in.

0.5 deg. per side

'

Inserts, steel or cast-iron inserts practical

Cast threads, not practical

Aluminum Die Casting


Size limitations

Maximum

practical over-all dimensions

(Few aluminum

36

12

9 in.

die castings exceed 25 in. in length)

Largest produced:
In size

By

1 in.

lb. (12

19

(14 lb.)

Greyhound buses)

weight

19

(Die-cast cases for Leeds

12

84

(Die-cast dog used as trade-mark on

20

in.)

and Northrup instruments)

Section thickness:

Large castings, minimum


Small castings less than 6 in. length or width
Avoid abrupt changes in wall thickness.
Dimensional tolerances
In any one dimension
(Frequently less by trial and error)

0.085 to 0.10

in.

0.050 to 0.065

in.

0.0015

in.

per

in.

Perpendicular to parting line:

Large castings
0.00 to -HO.OIO in.
Small castings
0.00 to -1-0.003 in.
Between points formed by removable part and die, tolerances are the same as those across parting line.
Cored holes:
Minimum diameter of cored holes
0.090 in. approx.
Length limit for through holes and blind holes:

Diameter

Under

^e

Length

3 diameters

rn.

To Min

6 diameters

Tolerances on through holes

Diameter

limit

Length limit

Over }^ in.
Larger holes.

10 diameters

No

small holes

Closer tolerances on through holes

limit

0.001

must be obtained by reaming, the hole being

in.

cast 0.005 to 0.010 in. undersize.

Cores for internal threads preferable to use threaded insert.


Draft allowances:
Outside walls, recommended
Rectangular core, on each side
Internal cores, in general, as in table below:

0.010

in. /in.

0.008

in. /in.

Approximate Diameter
OF Hole

Amount of Draft

Less than J^ in
3^ to 1 in

on diameter
on diameter
0.010-0.030 in. on diameter
(depending on size and design)

More than

in

0.015-0.020

in.

0.010-0.015

in.

If no draft is permissible, ream or, unless hole is shallow, use insert.


Small holes for tapping usually cast to root diameter of thread plus 15 per cent with standard draft added.

Inserts:
If strained,

Small pins,

should be knurled on surfaces within casting.


subject to pull, should be both knurled and grooved.

if

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS

269

Fillets:

Avoid sharp corners

if

possible.

Finishes

Alumilite finish best on alloy 218.

Colored alumilite best in darker shades.

metals if desired.
Design to aid trimming:
Design part so that flashes will be in or parallel to main parting plane.

Cast threads:
Internal threads
External threads

best to cast threaded


can be cast and need only

insert.

light chasing to finish.

May

be plated with

common

plating

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

270

THE DESIGN OF DROP FORGINGS


made from bar stock wherein the lines of the fibers run
Best forging results are obtained when the forging pressure is
applied along the axis of the bar, which will compel the metal to flow wdth least distorWhen metal is compelled to flow in a direction perpendicular
tion of the fiber hues.
to the lines of the fiber by means of pressure appUed perpendicular to the flow Unes,
as in raising a boss on a flat plate, the metal will not be as strong, especiaUy in its
An even worse condition is created when the metal is
resistance to impact loads.
compeUed to flow at an angle to the direction across the grain.
Most metal

forgings are

parallel to the axis.

The accompanying

flgures illustrate flow conditions in forging bars or plates.


Forging pressure

Forging pressure

Forging
pressure
''7/777777777777777777777777777777^77/

Raising a boss in this manner


weakens the metal.

Best forging condition.

Worst

condition

when a boss

is

thrown up
on a plane making an
is

angle with the flow lines.

v
/

Vo/ume curve

l^cor^ec^
design

-^

Volume curve
Correct
design

>

To

mML^J^^yt^

t.

forging

assure best forging conditions, a curve of volumes, such as above, should be

This enables the designer to visualize quickly and accurately the flow conThus to the left is the volume curve
obtained from a poor design as indicated by the abrupt changes in volume. To the
right is shown the same design corrected so that the volume curve changes smoothly.
Smooth changes in volume also indicate a design that is most economical to forge.
Poor flow conditions aaoII cause an excessive amount of flash, thereby necessitating an
excessive number of forging blows, which favors the formation of cold shuts, the metal
not fiUing the die cavity. Cracks and other defects are also hkely to result if the distribution of the metal around the neutral axis is
unsymmetrical
In making upset forgings, the bar stock is rough upset
and is usuaUy so proportioned that the upset ratio on the

plotted.

ditions that \\dU exist in the forging operations.

diameter will be 13^ to 2, the length upset ratio usually 2 to


2I2, with 3 as a maximima.
If it is greater than 3 diameters,
the bariwill usually buckle. However, length upset ratio may
exceed 3 diameters, but the die and operation costs will be
Gripping die

'

greatly increased.

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS

STANDARD TOLERANCES FOR FORGINGS UNDER

100 LB.

271

EACH*

Tolerances shall be either "special" or "regular." Special tolerances are those


which are particularly noted in the specifications and may state any or all tolerances
in any way as occasion may require.
Special tolerances apply only to the particular
dimension or thing noted. In all cases where special tolerances are not specified,
regular tolerances shall apply.

Regular tolerances are divided into two divisions, "commercial standard" and
"close standard."
Commercial standard tolerances are for general forging practice,
but when or where extra close work is desired involving additional expense and care
in the production of forgings, close standard may be specified.
Close standard may be
specified for one or more of the following classes.
When no standard is specified,
commercial standard shall apply.
Classes

Regular tolerances are applicable to the following


1.

Thickness.

2.

Width:

4.

(a) shrinkage and die wear;


Draft angle.
Quantity.

5.

Fillets

3.

and

(b)

mismatching;

(c)

corners.

THICKNESS TOLERANCES
(Inches)

Net weights up

classes:

trimmed

size.

HANDBOOK OF MECHANICAL DESIGN

272

Class

1.

Thickness Tolerances

Thickness tolerances shall apply to the over-all thickness of a forging.

When

applied to drop-hammer forgings, they shall apply to the thickness in a direction per-

When applied to
upset forgings, they shall apply to the thickness in a direction parallel to the direction
of travel of the ram, but only to such dimensions as are inclosed by the die.
pendicular to the main or fundamental parting plane of the die.

Class

Width and length

2.

Width and Length Tolerances

tolerances shall be ahke

and shall apply to the width and/or


length of a forging. When applied to drop-hammer forgings, they shall apply to the
width or length in a direction parallel to the main or fundamental parting plane of the
die, but only to such dimensions as are enclosed by and actually formed by the die.
When apphed to upset forgings, they shall apply to the width or length in a direction
perpendicular to the direction of travel of the ram.

Width and length

tolerances shall consist of three subdivisions:

Class 2a.

Shrinkage and die wear tolerance.

Class 26.

Mismatching

Class 2c.

Trimmed

tolerance.

size tolerance.

Class 2a.

Shrinkage and Die

Wear

Shrinkage and die wear tolerances shall apply to that part of the forging formed
single die block only.
They shall not apply to any dimension crossing the parting plane.
They shall be the sum of the shrinkage tolerances and the die wear tolerances as given in the following table. The shrinkage tolerances and die wear
tolerances shall not be applied separately, but shall only be used as the sum of the
two. They shall not be so applied as to include draft or variation thereof.

by a

SHRINKAGE PLUS DIE WEAR


(Inches)

Lengths or
widths up
to

in.

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS


Class 26.

Mismatching

is

273

Mismatching Tolerance

the displacement of a point in that part of a forging formed by

one die block of a pair, from its desired position when located from the part of the
Mismatching does not include any
forging formed in the other die block of the pair.
displacement caused by' variation in thickness of the forging but is only the displacement in a plane parallel to the main or fundamental parting plane of the dies.
Mismatching tolerances are independent of, and in addition to, any other
tolerances.

MISMATCHING TOLERANCE
Net weight up

to

lb.

274

HANDBOOK
Class

OF MECHANICAL DESIGN
4.

Quantity Tolerances

Quantity tolerances shall be the permissible over, or under, run allowed for each
Any shipping quantity within the limits of
release or part shipment of an order.
over, and under, run shall be considered as completing the order.
Commercial and
close tolerances shall be the same amounts.
QUANTITY TOLERANCES

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS


The

275

mil equal the length of the


drafted surface in inches, multiplied by the tangent of the nominal draft angle.
The radii of fillets and corners may be any value not greater than those given in
toward the wide end.

total increase in the radius

the following table.


FILLET

AND CORNER TOLERANCES


(Radii in Inches)

Net weights up

HANDBOOK

276

OF

MECHANICAL DESIGN

POWDERED METAL PRESSINGS


Design Factors

Direct pressure must be applied to the entire cross section of the part when moldThe amount of pressure required to obtain a required density in the compressed compact
depends upon the malleability of the metal powder used.
Powdered metal materials have almost no lateral flow in the mold in response to pressures
Formability.

ing.

applied axially, therefore reentrant angles cannot be molded in the compact.

If

reentrant angles

must be machined to shape by conventional methods.


means
of obtaining solid, pore-free compacts.
With this
a
also die and maintenance costs are higher.

are required at planes normal to the axis, thej^

pressing may be resorted to as


however,
the operation is slow,
method,
Capacity of press available determines the maximum cross-secSize and Shape Limitations.
can
compacted.
Pressures for compacting vary from 30 to 60 tons per sq. in.
area
that
be
tional
working
stroke
of
the
press,
the compression ratio of the powder selected, and the density
The
Compression ratios range between
required all determine the length of part that can be compacted.
2 to 1 and 20 to 1 for various metal powders. Length is limited bj^ minimum density desired because
frictional losses prevent the compacting pressure from being uniformly transmitted throughout the

Hot

depth of the mold.


Shapes are confined to simple contours without undercuts in surface parallel to the axis.
Dimensional Tolerances. Possible to hold ver}^ close tolerances in cross-sectional dimensions.
Tolerances in axial dimensions must be more liberal than those in cross sections, because all

the variables add up in the length of the briquette or the sintered piece.
Tolerances for concentricity depend largely upon the clearance that must be provided between
the force and the mold, since this clearance is likely to be all on one side when the compacting pressure
Eccentricity can be corrected by operatioas subsequent to sintering, such as swaging or
but this means additional cost.
Physical Properties. Tensile strengths depend upon unit pressures employed to briquette the
powders, the length of heat-treatment, and the care exercised in control of powder.
With heat-treating and quenching, it is possible to produce from alloy powders, gears that have
higher strength, wear, and impact resistance than case hardened low carbon steel.
Strength and density may also be improved by re-pressing or cold-working if the sintered piece
is

applied.

rolling,

is

sufficiently malleable.

Design Advantages.

Parts having selected properties can be made.

Two

or

more metal pow-

ders can be used to produce alloys which retain proportionately the individual characteristics of each
Many special properties can be obtained by incorporating nonmetallic ingredients
constituent.

with the metal powder, but this I'educes strength.


Economical for the production of parts which if made by other methods would involve considerable cost for machining operations in comparison with the cost of the material, or where scrap
The more complicated the machining required by a piece made by other
losses would be high.
methods, the smaller the quantity that would have to be produced from metal powders in order to
carry the expense for tools and equipment.

DESIGN DATA ON PRODUCTION METHODS

277

PARTS MADE FROM METAL POWDERS


These surfaces must
be smooi-h and free y

from

burrs,

yjSharp corners
all others

approx

0.005 R

0.333
0.35$

0.557
0.562

0.095d/a

0.325^

0345
0.201

0.455 0.208

fZ^'fS chamfer
optional

0.998,

0.1665
-

"0.1695
0.0395
0.0445

0.080
0.090

0.500 R'
0.503

-^

0.459^-X'
0.448
0.458

0.1550
0.1575

0.090 max flat

as
\T'

V\o.26t-^
^'^0.281

J
^

V 0.151
^ai6l
0.161

on 0.6850

musf be concentric

0.008 RmoK

O.D.

When measured

\'

0.683 spherical dia


05.55

io within O.OOZ

assemble
dia hole

wlih
I.R.

ball musi
in 0. 999

CLUTCH RELEASE SHAFT BEARING

RADIO TUNING BRAKE

Note: There can be no burr, ridge or seam


oijuncfion of cylindrical and flai
outside surface

O.D.
/

with

Grind

I.D.

O.D. -

0.0015 1.R.- Pitch circle with 10.0.00257.1?:

Burnish tooth profile

0.302
0.322'

0.015x4Schamf.OD

J2x45chamf/.D. both ends., 0.025 boih ends


j2 drilled hole - ^
in tooth space

'

^
^x45chamfer
i. r.45

chamfer''

0.0435
0.0485

I 0.0565
0.0515

^0.145 hole
0.148

0.4815
burnish
0.4825
1.2485 ^
'1.2505"
A 0.615

Ends must be square

0.015x45"

chamfer

with axis within 0.001


Total ind. reading on

SPRING HOUSING

^0.635
*

end of tooth

End grind'

Inspection data
l'45l5

^^''

0250 roll's Qjiofi

^'^''^f'?"

parallel ja^

over two feeth

0.0003 max variation of oj526 dim. on any one


gear. Tooth strength of 1200 lb shear load min.

SPUR PINION
Note: fractional dimensions
1 0.010

Face flat within 0.002 ^0.755


indicofor reading < ^
-^

1.480

-^0.020

32^'^^

t^
0.1552
0.1572

chamt
C-

0010 R
0529

Hat

^0.534.

16x45 chamfer

CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING

^0.840^

DRIVE GEAR FOR


AGITATOR SHAFTON

WASHING MACHINE

15 teeth
10 dia pitch

20 PA

500 pitch dia


Tooth shape within 1 0.00
Pitch line must run concentric with bore within 0.002
1

You might also like